Initial checkin
This commit is contained in:
commit
25913552a2
BIN
assets/image_1746125643370_0.png
Normal file
BIN
assets/image_1746125643370_0.png
Normal file
Binary file not shown.
After Width: | Height: | Size: 153 KiB |
2
journals/2025_05_01.md
Normal file
2
journals/2025_05_01.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
|
||||
- **13:13** Created this document for the 2023-2027 [[General Syllabus]] and question pool
|
||||
- **13:56** Created the [[About]] page
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G0A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.958Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G0A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.958Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G0A – RF safety principles, rules, and guidelines; routine station evaluation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G0A01]] (A)
|
||||
What is one way that RF energy can affect human body tissue?
|
||||
- A. It heats body tissue
|
||||
- B. It causes radiation poisoning
|
||||
- C. It causes the blood count to reach a dangerously low level
|
||||
- D. It cools body tissue
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is used to determine RF exposure from a transmitted signal?
|
||||
- A. Its duty cycle
|
||||
- B. Its frequency
|
||||
- C. Its power density
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A03]] (D) [97.13(c)(1)]
|
||||
How can you determine that your station complies with FCC RF exposure regulations?
|
||||
- A. By calculation based on FCC OET Bulletin 65
|
||||
- B. By calculation based on computer modeling
|
||||
- C. By measurement of field strength using calibrated equipment
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A04]] (D)
|
||||
What does “time averaging” mean when evaluating RF radiation exposure?
|
||||
- A. The average amount of power developed by the transmitter over a specific 24-hour period
|
||||
- B. The average time it takes RF radiation to have any long-term effect on the body
|
||||
- C. The total time of the exposure
|
||||
- D. The total RF exposure averaged over a certain period
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A05]] (A) [97.13(c)(2), 1.1307(b)]
|
||||
What must you do if an evaluation of your station shows that the RF energy radiated by your station exceeds permissible limits for possible human absorption?
|
||||
- A. Take action to prevent human exposure to the excessive RF fields
|
||||
- B. File an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS-97) with the FCC
|
||||
- C. Secure written permission from your neighbors to operate above the controlled MPE limits
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A06]] (A) [97.13(c)(2), 1.1307(1)(b)(3)(i)]
|
||||
What must you do if your station fails to meet the FCC RF exposure exemption criteria?
|
||||
- A. Perform an RF Exposure Evaluation in accordance with FCC OET Bulletin 65
|
||||
- B. Contact the FCC for permission to transmit
|
||||
- C. Perform an RF exposure evaluation in accordance with World Meteorological Organization guidelines
|
||||
- D. Use an FCC-approved band-pass filter
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A07]] (A)
|
||||
What is the effect of modulation duty cycle on RF exposure?
|
||||
- A. A lower duty cycle permits greater power levels to be transmitted
|
||||
- B. A higher duty cycle permits greater power levels to be transmitted
|
||||
- C. Low duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure evaluation requirements
|
||||
- D. High duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure requirements
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A08]] (C) [97.13(c)(2)]
|
||||
Which of the following steps must an amateur operator take to ensure compliance with RF safety regulations?
|
||||
- A. Post a copy of FCC Part 97.13 in the station
|
||||
- B. Notify neighbors within a 100-foot radius of the antenna of the existence of the station and power levels
|
||||
- C. Perform a routine RF exposure evaluation and prevent access to any identified high exposure areas
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A09]] (B)
|
||||
What type of instrument can be used to accurately measure an RF field strength?
|
||||
- A. A receiver with digital signal processing (DSP) noise reduction
|
||||
- B. A calibrated field strength meter with a calibrated antenna
|
||||
- C. An SWR meter with a peak-reading function
|
||||
- D. An oscilloscope with a high-stability crystal marker generator
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A10]] (C)
|
||||
What should be done if evaluation shows that a neighbor might experience more than the allowable limit of RF exposure from the main lobe of a directional antenna?
|
||||
- A. Change to a non-polarized antenna with higher gain
|
||||
- B. Use an antenna with a higher front-to-back ratio
|
||||
- C. Take precautions to ensure that the antenna cannot be pointed in their direction when they are present
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A11]] (C)
|
||||
What precaution should be taken if you install an indoor transmitting antenna?
|
||||
- A. Locate the antenna close to your operating position to minimize feed-line radiation
|
||||
- B. Position the antenna along the edge of a wall to reduce parasitic radiation
|
||||
- C. Make sure that MPE limits are not exceeded in occupied areas
|
||||
- D. Make sure the antenna is properly shielded
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0A12]] (D) [1.1307(1)(b)(3)(i)(A)]
|
||||
What stations are subject to the FCC rules on RF exposure?
|
||||
- A. All commercial stations; amateur radio stations are exempt
|
||||
- B. Only stations with antennas lower than one wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- C. Only stations transmitting more than 500 watts PEP
|
||||
- D. All stations with a time-averaged transmission of more than one milliwatt
|
74
logseq/bak/pages/G0A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.564Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
74
logseq/bak/pages/G0A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.564Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G0A – RF safety principles, rules, and guidelines; routine station evaluation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G0A01]] (A)
|
||||
What is one way that RF energy can affect human body tissue?
|
||||
- A. It heats body tissue
|
||||
- B. It causes radiation poisoning
|
||||
- C. It causes the blood count to reach a dangerously low level
|
||||
- D. It cools body tissue
|
||||
- [[G0A02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is used to determine RF exposure from a transmitted signal?
|
||||
- A. Its duty cycle
|
||||
- B. Its frequency
|
||||
- C. Its power density
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A03]] (D) [97.13(c)(1)]
|
||||
How can you determine that your station complies with FCC RF exposure regulations?
|
||||
- A. By calculation based on FCC OET Bulletin 65
|
||||
- B. By calculation based on computer modeling
|
||||
- C. By measurement of field strength using calibrated equipment
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A04]] (D)
|
||||
What does “time averaging” mean when evaluating RF radiation exposure?
|
||||
- A. The average amount of power developed by the transmitter over a specific 24-hour period
|
||||
- B. The average time it takes RF radiation to have any long-term effect on the body
|
||||
- C. The total time of the exposure
|
||||
- D. The total RF exposure averaged over a certain period
|
||||
- [[G0A05]] (A) [97.13(c)(2), 1.1307(b)]
|
||||
What must you do if an evaluation of your station shows that the RF energy radiated by your station exceeds permissible limits for possible human absorption?
|
||||
- A. Take action to prevent human exposure to the excessive RF fields
|
||||
- B. File an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS-97) with the FCC
|
||||
- C. Secure written permission from your neighbors to operate above the controlled MPE limits
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A06]] (A) [97.13(c)(2), 1.1307(1)(b)(3)(i)]
|
||||
What must you do if your station fails to meet the FCC RF exposure exemption criteria?
|
||||
- A. Perform an RF Exposure Evaluation in accordance with FCC OET Bulletin 65
|
||||
- B. Contact the FCC for permission to transmit
|
||||
- C. Perform an RF exposure evaluation in accordance with World Meteorological Organization guidelines
|
||||
- D. Use an FCC-approved band-pass filter
|
||||
- [[G0A07]] (A)
|
||||
What is the effect of modulation duty cycle on RF exposure?
|
||||
- A. A lower duty cycle permits greater power levels to be transmitted
|
||||
- B. A higher duty cycle permits greater power levels to be transmitted
|
||||
- C. Low duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure evaluation requirements
|
||||
- D. High duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure requirements
|
||||
- [[G0A08]] (C) [97.13(c)(2)]
|
||||
Which of the following steps must an amateur operator take to ensure compliance with RF safety regulations?
|
||||
- A. Post a copy of FCC Part 97.13 in the station
|
||||
- B. Notify neighbors within a 100-foot radius of the antenna of the existence of the station and power levels
|
||||
- C. Perform a routine RF exposure evaluation and prevent access to any identified high exposure areas
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A09]] (B)
|
||||
What type of instrument can be used to accurately measure an RF field strength?
|
||||
- A. A receiver with digital signal processing (DSP) noise reduction
|
||||
- B. A calibrated field strength meter with a calibrated antenna
|
||||
- C. An SWR meter with a peak-reading function
|
||||
- D. An oscilloscope with a high-stability crystal marker generator
|
||||
- [[G0A10]] (C)
|
||||
What should be done if evaluation shows that a neighbor might experience more than the allowable limit of RF exposure from the main lobe of a directional antenna?
|
||||
- A. Change to a non-polarized antenna with higher gain
|
||||
- B. Use an antenna with a higher front-to-back ratio
|
||||
- C. Take precautions to ensure that the antenna cannot be pointed in their direction when they are present
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A11]] (C)
|
||||
What precaution should be taken if you install an indoor transmitting antenna?
|
||||
- A. Locate the antenna close to your operating position to minimize feed-line radiation
|
||||
- B. Position the antenna along the edge of a wall to reduce parasitic radiation
|
||||
- C. Make sure that MPE limits are not exceeded in occupied areas
|
||||
- D. Make sure the antenna is properly shielded
|
||||
- [[G0A12]] (D) [1.1307(1)(b)(3)(i)(A)]
|
||||
What stations are subject to the FCC rules on RF exposure?
|
||||
- A. All commercial stations; amateur radio stations are exempt
|
||||
- B. Only stations with antennas lower than one wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- C. Only stations transmitting more than 500 watts PEP
|
||||
- D. All stations with a time-averaged transmission of more than one milliwatt
|
92
logseq/bak/pages/G0B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.963Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
92
logseq/bak/pages/G0B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.963Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
|
||||
G0B – Station safety: electrical shock, grounding, fusing, interlocks, and wiring; antenna and tower safety
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G0B01]] (A)
|
||||
Which wire or wires in a four-conductor 240 VAC circuit should be attached to fuses or circuit breakers?
|
||||
- A. Only the hot wires
|
||||
- B. Only the neutral wire
|
||||
- C. Only the ground wire
|
||||
- D. All wires
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B02]] (C)
|
||||
According to the National Electrical Code, what is the minimum wire size that may be used safely for wiring with a 20-ampere circuit breaker?
|
||||
- A. AWG number 20
|
||||
- B. AWG number 16
|
||||
- C. AWG number 12
|
||||
- D. AWG number 8
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B03]] (D)
|
||||
Which size of fuse or circuit breaker would be appropriate to use with a circuit that uses AWG number 14 wiring?
|
||||
- A. 30 amperes
|
||||
- B. 25 amperes
|
||||
- C. 20 amperes
|
||||
- D. 15 amperes
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B04]] (B)
|
||||
Where should the station’s lightning protection ground system be located?
|
||||
- A. As close to the station equipment as possible
|
||||
- B. Outside the building
|
||||
- C. Next to the closest power pole
|
||||
- D. Parallel to the water supply line
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B05]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following conditions will cause a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) to disconnect AC power?
|
||||
- A. Current flowing from one or more of the hot wires to the neutral wire
|
||||
- B. Current flowing from one or more of the hot wires directly to ground
|
||||
- C. Overvoltage on the hot wires
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B06]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is covered by the National Electrical Code?
|
||||
- A. Acceptable bandwidth limits
|
||||
- B. Acceptable modulation limits
|
||||
- C. Electrical safety of the station
|
||||
- D. RF exposure limits of the human body
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of these choices should be observed when climbing a tower using a safety harness?
|
||||
- A. Always hold on to the tower with one hand
|
||||
- B. Confirm that the harness is rated for the weight of the climber and that it is within its allowable service life
|
||||
- C. Ensure that all heavy tools are securely fastened to the harness
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B08]] (B)
|
||||
What should be done before climbing a tower that supports electrically powered devices?
|
||||
- A. Notify the electric company that a person will be working on the tower
|
||||
- B. Make sure all circuits that supply power to the tower are locked out and tagged
|
||||
- C. Unground the base of the tower
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B09]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is true of an emergency generator installation?
|
||||
- A. The generator should be operated in a well-ventilated area
|
||||
- B. The generator must be insulated from ground
|
||||
- C. Fuel should be stored near the generator for rapid refueling in case of an emergency
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B10]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is a danger from lead-tin solder?
|
||||
- A. Lead can contaminate food if hands are not washed carefully after handling the solder
|
||||
- B. High voltages can cause lead-tin solder to disintegrate suddenly
|
||||
- C. Tin in the solder can “cold flow,” causing shorts in the circuit
|
||||
- D. RF energy can convert the lead into a poisonous gas
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B11]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is required for lightning protection ground rods?
|
||||
- A. They must be bonded to all buried water and gas lines
|
||||
- B. Bends in ground wires must be made as close as possible to a right angle
|
||||
- C. Lightning grounds must be connected to all ungrounded wiring
|
||||
- D. They must be bonded together with all other grounds
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B12]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a power supply interlock?
|
||||
- A. To prevent unauthorized changes to the circuit that would void the manufacturer’s warranty
|
||||
- B. To shut down the unit if it becomes too hot
|
||||
- C. To ensure that dangerous voltages are removed if the cabinet is opened
|
||||
- D. To shut off the power supply if too much voltage is produced
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G0B13]] (A)
|
||||
Where should lightning arrestors be located?
|
||||
- A. Where the feed lines enter the building
|
||||
- B. On the antenna, opposite the feed point
|
||||
- C. In series with each ground lead
|
||||
- D. At the closest power pole ground electrode
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G1A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.959Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G1A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.959Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G1A – General class control operator frequency privileges; primary and secondary allocations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1A01]] (C) [97.301(d)]
|
||||
On which HF and/or MF amateur bands are there portions where General class licensees cannot transmit?
|
||||
- A. 60 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, and 12 meters
|
||||
- B. 160 meters, 60 meters, 15 meters, and 12 meters
|
||||
- C. 80 meters, 40 meters, 20 meters, and 15 meters
|
||||
- D. 80 meters, 20 meters, 15 meters, and 10 meters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A02]] (B) [97.305]
|
||||
On which of the following bands is phone operation prohibited?
|
||||
- A. 160 meters
|
||||
- B. 30 meters
|
||||
- C. 17 meters
|
||||
- D. 12 meters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A03]] (B) [97.305]
|
||||
On which of the following bands is image transmission prohibited?
|
||||
- A. 160 meters
|
||||
- B. 30 meters
|
||||
- C. 20 meters
|
||||
- D. 12 meters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A04]] (D) [97.303(h)]
|
||||
Which of the following amateur bands is restricted to communication only on specific channels, rather than frequency ranges?
|
||||
- A. 11 meters
|
||||
- B. 12 meters
|
||||
- C. 30 meters
|
||||
- D. 60 meters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A05]] (A) [97.301(d)]
|
||||
On which of the following frequencies are General class licensees prohibited from operating as control operator?
|
||||
- A. 7.125 MHz to 7.175 MHz
|
||||
- B. 28.000 MHz to 28.025 MHz
|
||||
- C. 21.275 MHz to 21.300 MHz
|
||||
- D. All of the above
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A06]] (C) [97.303]
|
||||
Which of the following applies when the FCC rules designate the amateur service as a secondary user on a band?
|
||||
- A. Amateur stations must record the call sign of the primary service station before operating on a frequency assigned to that station
|
||||
- B. Amateur stations may use the band only during emergencies
|
||||
- C. Amateur stations must not cause harmful interference to primary users and must accept interference from primary users
|
||||
- D. Amateur stations may only operate during specific hours of the day, while primary users are permitted 24-hour use of the band
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A07]] (D) [97.305(a)]
|
||||
On which amateur frequencies in the 10-meter band may stations with a General class control operator transmit CW emissions?
|
||||
- A. 28.000 MHz to 28.025 MHz only
|
||||
- B. 28.000 MHz to 28.300 MHz only
|
||||
- C. 28.025 MHz to 28.300 MHz only
|
||||
- D. The entire band
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A08]] (B) [97.301(b)]
|
||||
Which HF bands have segments exclusively allocated to Amateur Extra licensees?
|
||||
- A. All HF bands
|
||||
- B. 80 meters, 40 meters, 20 meters, and 15 meters
|
||||
- C. All HF bands except 160 meters and 10 meters
|
||||
- D. 60 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, and 12 meters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A09]] (C) [97.301(d)]
|
||||
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 15-meter band?
|
||||
- A. 14250 kHz
|
||||
- B. 18155 kHz
|
||||
- C. 21300 kHz
|
||||
- D. 24900 kHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A10]] (D) [97.205(b)]
|
||||
What portion of the 10-meter band is available for repeater use?
|
||||
- A. The entire band
|
||||
- B. The portion between 28.1 MHz and 28.2 MHz
|
||||
- C. The portion between 28.3 MHz and 28.5 MHz
|
||||
- D. The portion above 29.5 MHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1A11]] (B) [97.301]
|
||||
When General class licensees are not permitted to use the entire voice portion of a band, which portion of the voice segment is available to them?
|
||||
- A. The lower frequency portion
|
||||
- B. The upper frequency portion
|
||||
- C. The lower frequency portion on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the upper portion on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
|
||||
- D. The upper frequency portion on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the lower portion on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G1B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.960Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G1B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.960Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G1B – Antenna structure limitations; good engineering and good amateur practice; beacon operation; prohibited transmissions; retransmitting radio signals
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1B01]] (C) [97.15(a)]
|
||||
What is the maximum height above ground for an antenna structure not near a public use airport without requiring notification to the FAA and registration with the FCC?
|
||||
- A. 50 feet
|
||||
- B. 100 feet
|
||||
- C. 200 feet
|
||||
- D. 250 feet
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B02]] (A) [97.203(b)]
|
||||
With which of the following conditions must beacon stations comply?
|
||||
- A. No more than one beacon station may transmit in the same band from the same station location
|
||||
- B. The frequency must be coordinated with the National Beacon Organization
|
||||
- C. The frequency must be posted on the internet or published in a national periodical
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B03]] (A) [97.3(a)(9)]
|
||||
Which of the following is a purpose of a beacon station as identified in the FCC rules?
|
||||
- A. Observation of propagation and reception
|
||||
- B. Automatic identification of repeaters
|
||||
- C. Transmission of bulletins of general interest to amateur radio licensees
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B04]] (C) [97.113(c)]
|
||||
Which of the following transmissions is permitted for all amateur stations?
|
||||
- A. Unidentified transmissions of less than 10 seconds duration for test purposes only
|
||||
- B. Automatic retransmission of other amateur signals by any amateur station
|
||||
- C. Occasional retransmission of weather and propagation forecast information from US government stations
|
||||
- D. Encrypted messages, if not intended to facilitate a criminal act
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B05]] (B) [97.111((5)(b)]
|
||||
Which of the following one-way transmissions are permitted?
|
||||
- A. Unidentified test transmissions of less than 10 seconds in duration
|
||||
- B. Transmissions to assist with learning the International Morse code
|
||||
- C. Regular transmissions offering equipment for sale, if intended for amateur radio use
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B06]] (D) [97.15(b), PRB-1, 101 FCC 2d 952 (1985)]
|
||||
Under what conditions are state and local governments permitted to regulate amateur radio antenna structures?
|
||||
- A. Under no circumstances, FCC rules take priority
|
||||
- B. At any time and to any extent necessary to accomplish a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity, provided that proper filings are made with the FCC
|
||||
- C. Only when such structures exceed 50 feet in height and are clearly visible 1,000 feet from the structure
|
||||
- D. Amateur Service communications must be reasonably accommodated, and regulations must constitute the minimum practical to accommodate a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B07]] (B) [97.113(a)(4)]
|
||||
What are the restrictions on the use of abbreviations or procedural signals in the amateur service?
|
||||
- A. Only “Q” signals are permitted
|
||||
- B. They may be used if they do not obscure the meaning of a message
|
||||
- C. They are not permitted
|
||||
- D. They are limited to those expressly listed in Part 97 of the FCC rules
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B08]] (B) [97.111(a)(1)]
|
||||
When is it permissible to communicate with amateur stations in countries outside the areas administered by the Federal Communications Commission?
|
||||
- A. Only when the foreign country has a formal third-party agreement filed with the FCC
|
||||
- B. When the contact is with amateurs in any country except those whose administrations have notified the ITU that they object to such communications
|
||||
- C. Only when the contact is with amateurs licensed by a country which is a member of the United Nations, or by a territory possessed by such a country
|
||||
- D. Only when the contact is with amateurs licensed by a country which is a member of the International Amateur Radio Union, or by a territory possessed by such a country
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B09]] (D) [97.203(d)]
|
||||
On what HF frequencies are automatically controlled beacons permitted?
|
||||
- A. On any frequency if power is less than 1 watt
|
||||
- B. On any frequency if transmissions are in Morse code
|
||||
- C. 21.08 MHz to 21.09 MHz
|
||||
- D. 28.20 MHz to 28.30 MHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B10]] (C) [97.203(c)]
|
||||
What is the power limit for beacon stations?
|
||||
- A. 10 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 20 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 100 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1B11]] (A) [97.101(a)]
|
||||
Who or what determines “good engineering and good amateur practice,” as applied to the operation of an amateur station in all respects not covered by the Part 97 rules?
|
||||
- A. The FCC
|
||||
- B. The control operator
|
||||
- C. The IEEE
|
||||
- D. The ITU
|
68
logseq/bak/pages/G1B/2025-05-01T18_49_27.567Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
68
logseq/bak/pages/G1B/2025-05-01T18_49_27.567Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G1B – Antenna structure limitations; good engineering and good amateur practice; beacon operation; prohibited transmissions; retransmitting radio signals
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1B01]] (C) [97.15(a)]
|
||||
What is the maximum height above ground for an antenna structure not near a public use airport without requiring notification to the FAA and registration with the FCC?
|
||||
- A. 50 feet
|
||||
- B. 100 feet
|
||||
- C. 200 feet
|
||||
- D. 250 feet
|
||||
- [[G1B02]] (A) [97.203(b)]
|
||||
With which of the following conditions must beacon stations comply?
|
||||
- A. No more than one beacon station may transmit in the same band from the same station location
|
||||
- B. The frequency must be coordinated with the National Beacon Organization
|
||||
- C. The frequency must be posted on the internet or published in a national periodical
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1B03]] (A) [97.3(a)(9)]
|
||||
Which of the following is a purpose of a beacon station as identified in the FCC rules?
|
||||
- A. Observation of propagation and reception
|
||||
- B. Automatic identification of repeaters
|
||||
- C. Transmission of bulletins of general interest to amateur radio licensees
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1B04]] (C) [97.113(c)]
|
||||
Which of the following transmissions is permitted for all amateur stations?
|
||||
- A. Unidentified transmissions of less than 10 seconds duration for test purposes only
|
||||
- B. Automatic retransmission of other amateur signals by any amateur station
|
||||
- C. Occasional retransmission of weather and propagation forecast information from US government stations
|
||||
- D. Encrypted messages, if not intended to facilitate a criminal act
|
||||
- [[G1B05]] (B) [97.111((5)(b)]
|
||||
Which of the following one-way transmissions are permitted?
|
||||
- A. Unidentified test transmissions of less than 10 seconds in duration
|
||||
- B. Transmissions to assist with learning the International Morse code
|
||||
- C. Regular transmissions offering equipment for sale, if intended for amateur radio use
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1B06]] (D) [97.15(b), PRB-1, 101 FCC 2d 952 (1985)]
|
||||
Under what conditions are state and local governments permitted to regulate amateur radio antenna structures?
|
||||
- A. Under no circumstances, FCC rules take priority
|
||||
- B. At any time and to any extent necessary to accomplish a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity, provided that proper filings are made with the FCC
|
||||
- C. Only when such structures exceed 50 feet in height and are clearly visible 1,000 feet from the structure
|
||||
- D. Amateur Service communications must be reasonably accommodated, and regulations must constitute the minimum practical to accommodate a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity
|
||||
- [[G1B07]] (B) [97.113(a)(4)]
|
||||
What are the restrictions on the use of abbreviations or procedural signals in the amateur service?
|
||||
- A. Only “Q” signals are permitted
|
||||
- B. They may be used if they do not obscure the meaning of a message
|
||||
- C. They are not permitted
|
||||
- D. They are limited to those expressly listed in Part 97 of the FCC rules
|
||||
- [[G1B08]] (B) [97.111(a)(1)]
|
||||
When is it permissible to communicate with amateur stations in countries outside the areas administered by the Federal Communications Commission?
|
||||
- A. Only when the foreign country has a formal third-party agreement filed with the FCC
|
||||
- B. When the contact is with amateurs in any country except those whose administrations have notified the ITU that they object to such communications
|
||||
- C. Only when the contact is with amateurs licensed by a country which is a member of the United Nations, or by a territory possessed by such a country
|
||||
- D. Only when the contact is with amateurs licensed by a country which is a member of the International Amateur Radio Union, or by a territory possessed by such a country
|
||||
- [[G1B09]] (D) [97.203(d)]
|
||||
On what HF frequencies are automatically controlled beacons permitted?
|
||||
- A. On any frequency if power is less than 1 watt
|
||||
- B. On any frequency if transmissions are in Morse code
|
||||
- C. 21.08 MHz to 21.09 MHz
|
||||
- D. 28.20 MHz to 28.30 MHz
|
||||
- [[G1B10]] (C) [97.203(c)]
|
||||
What is the power limit for beacon stations?
|
||||
- A. 10 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 20 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 100 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- [[G1B11]] (A) [97.101(a)]
|
||||
Who or what determines “good engineering and good amateur practice,” as applied to the operation of an amateur station in all respects not covered by the Part 97 rules?
|
||||
- A. The FCC
|
||||
- B. The control operator
|
||||
- C. The IEEE
|
||||
- D. The ITU
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G1C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.961Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G1C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.961Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G1C – Transmitter power regulations; data emission standards; 60-meter operation requirements
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1C01]] (A) [97.313(c)(1)]
|
||||
What is the maximum transmitter power an amateur station may use on 10.140 MHz?
|
||||
- A. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 1000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 2000 watts PEP output
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C02]] (C) [97.313]
|
||||
What is the maximum transmitter power an amateur station may use on the 12-meter band?
|
||||
- A. 50 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. An effective radiated power equivalent to 100 watts from a half-wave dipole
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C03]] (A) [97.303(h)(1)]
|
||||
What is the maximum bandwidth permitted by FCC rules for amateur radio stations transmitting on USB frequencies in the 60-meter band?
|
||||
- A. 2.8 kHz
|
||||
- B. 5.6 kHz
|
||||
- C. 1.8 kHz
|
||||
- D. 3 kHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C04]] (A) [97.303(i)]
|
||||
Which of the following is required by the FCC rules when operating in the 60-meter band?
|
||||
- A. If you are using an antenna other than a dipole, you must keep a record of the gain of your antenna
|
||||
- B. You must keep a record of the date, time, frequency, power level, and stations worked
|
||||
- C. You must keep a record of all third-party traffic
|
||||
- D. You must keep a record of the manufacturer of your equipment and the antenna used
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C05]] (C) [97.313]
|
||||
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 28 MHz band for a General Class control operator?
|
||||
- A. 100 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 1000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 2000 watts PEP output
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C06]] (D) [97.313]
|
||||
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 1.8 MHz band?
|
||||
- A. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 1000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C07]] (C) [97.309(a)(4)]
|
||||
What must be done before using a new digital protocol on the air?
|
||||
- A. Type-certify equipment to FCC standards
|
||||
- B. Obtain an experimental license from the FCC
|
||||
- C. Publicly document the technical characteristics of the protocol
|
||||
- D. Submit a rule-making proposal to the FCC describing the codes and methods of the technique
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C08]] (D) [97.307(f)(3)]
|
||||
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted at frequencies below 28 MHz?
|
||||
- A. 56 kilobaud
|
||||
- B. 19.6 kilobaud
|
||||
- C. 1200 baud
|
||||
- D. 300 baud
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C09]] (C) [97.313(i)]
|
||||
What is the maximum power limit on the 60-meter band?
|
||||
- A. 1500 watts PEP
|
||||
- B. 10 watts RMS
|
||||
- C. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to a dipole
|
||||
- D. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to an isotropic antenna
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C10]] (C) [97.305(c) and 97.307(f)(4)]
|
||||
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 10-meter band?
|
||||
- A. 56 kilobaud
|
||||
- B. 19.6 kilobaud
|
||||
- C. 1200 baud
|
||||
- D. 300 baud
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1C11]] (D) [97.313]
|
||||
What measurement is specified by FCC rules that regulate maximum power?
|
||||
- A. RMS output from the transmitter
|
||||
- B. RMS input to the antenna
|
||||
- C. PEP input to the antenna
|
||||
- D. PEP output from the transmitter
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G1D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.960Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G1D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.960Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G1D – Volunteer Examiners and Volunteer Examiner Coordinators; temporary identification; element credit; remote operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1D01]] (A) [97.501, 97.505(a)]
|
||||
Who may receive partial credit for the elements represented by an expired amateur radio license?
|
||||
- A. Any person who can demonstrate that they once held an FCC-issued General, Advanced, or Amateur Extra class license that was not revoked by the FCC
|
||||
- B. Anyone who held an FCC-issued amateur radio license that expired not less than 5 and not more than 15 years ago
|
||||
- C. Any person who previously held an amateur license issued by another country, but only if that country has a current reciprocal licensing agreement with the FCC
|
||||
- D. Only persons who once held an FCC issued Novice, Technician, or Technician Plus license
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D02]] (C) [97.509(b)(3)(i)]
|
||||
What license examinations may you administer as an accredited Volunteer Examiner holding a General class operator license?
|
||||
- A. General and Technician
|
||||
- B. None, only Amateur Extra class licensees may be accredited
|
||||
- C. Technician only
|
||||
- D. Amateur Extra, General, and Technician
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D03]] (C) [97.9(b)]
|
||||
On which of the following band segments may you operate if you are a Technician class operator and have an unexpired Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class privileges?
|
||||
- A. Only the Technician band segments until your upgrade is posted in the FCC database
|
||||
- B. Only on the Technician band segments until you have a receipt for the FCC application fee payment
|
||||
- C. On any General or Technician class band segment
|
||||
- D. On any General or Technician class band segment except 30 meters and 60 meters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D04]] (A) [97.509(3)(i)(c)]
|
||||
Who must observe the administration of a Technician class license examination?
|
||||
- A. At least three Volunteer Examiners of General class or higher
|
||||
- B. At least two Volunteer Examiners of General class or higher
|
||||
- C. At least two Volunteer Examiners of Technician class or higher
|
||||
- D. At least three Volunteer Examiners of Technician class
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D05]] (A) [97.7]
|
||||
When operating a US station by remote control from outside the country, what license is required of the control operator?
|
||||
- A. A US operator/primary station license
|
||||
- B. Only an appropriate US operator/primary license and a special remote station permit from the FCC
|
||||
- C. Only a license from the foreign country, as long as the call sign includes identification of portable operation in the US
|
||||
- D. A license from the foreign country and a special remote station permit from the FCC
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D06]] (A) [97.119(f)(2)]
|
||||
Until an upgrade to General class is shown in the FCC database, when must a Technician licensee identify with “AG” after their call sign?
|
||||
- A. Whenever they operate using General class frequency privileges
|
||||
- B. Whenever they operate on any amateur frequency
|
||||
- C. Whenever they operate using Technician frequency privileges
|
||||
- D. A special identifier is not required if their General class license application has been filed with the FCC
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D07]] (C) [97.509(b)(1)]
|
||||
Volunteer Examiners are accredited by what organization?
|
||||
- A. The Federal Communications Commission
|
||||
- B. The Universal Licensing System
|
||||
- C. A Volunteer Examiner Coordinator
|
||||
- D. The Wireless Telecommunications Bureau
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D08]] (B) [97.509(b)(3)]
|
||||
Which of the following criteria must be met for a non-US citizen to be an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
|
||||
- A. The person must be a resident of the US for a minimum of 5 years
|
||||
- B. The person must hold an FCC granted amateur radio license of General class or above
|
||||
- C. The person’s home citizenship must be in ITU region 2
|
||||
- D. None of these choices is correct; a non-US citizen cannot be a Volunteer Examiner
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D09]] (C) [97.9(b)]
|
||||
How long is a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) valid for exam element credit?
|
||||
- A. 30 days
|
||||
- B. 180 days
|
||||
- C. 365 days
|
||||
- D. For as long as your current license is valid
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D10]] (B) [97.509(b)(2)]
|
||||
What is the minimum age that one must be to qualify as an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
|
||||
- A. 16 years
|
||||
- B. 18 years
|
||||
- C. 21 years
|
||||
- D. There is no age limit
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D11]] (D) [97.505]
|
||||
What action is required to obtain a new General class license after a previously held license has expired and the two-year grace period has passed?
|
||||
- A. They must have a letter from the FCC showing they once held an amateur or commercial license
|
||||
- B. There are no requirements other than being able to show a copy of the expired license
|
||||
- C. Contact the FCC to have the license reinstated
|
||||
- D. The applicant must show proof of the appropriate expired license grant and pass the current Element 2 exam
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1D12]] (C) [97.507]
|
||||
When operating a station in South America by remote control over the internet from the US, what regulations apply?
|
||||
- A. Those of both the remote station’s country and the FCC
|
||||
- B. Those of the remote station’s country and the FCC’s third-party regulations
|
||||
- C. Only those of the remote station’s country
|
||||
- D. Only those of the FCC
|
74
logseq/bak/pages/G1D/2025-05-01T18_49_27.564Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
74
logseq/bak/pages/G1D/2025-05-01T18_49_27.564Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G1D – Volunteer Examiners and Volunteer Examiner Coordinators; temporary identification; element credit; remote operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1D01]] (A) [97.501, 97.505(a)]
|
||||
Who may receive partial credit for the elements represented by an expired amateur radio license?
|
||||
- A. Any person who can demonstrate that they once held an FCC-issued General, Advanced, or Amateur Extra class license that was not revoked by the FCC
|
||||
- B. Anyone who held an FCC-issued amateur radio license that expired not less than 5 and not more than 15 years ago
|
||||
- C. Any person who previously held an amateur license issued by another country, but only if that country has a current reciprocal licensing agreement with the FCC
|
||||
- D. Only persons who once held an FCC issued Novice, Technician, or Technician Plus license
|
||||
- [[G1D02]] (C) [97.509(b)(3)(i)]
|
||||
What license examinations may you administer as an accredited Volunteer Examiner holding a General class operator license?
|
||||
- A. General and Technician
|
||||
- B. None, only Amateur Extra class licensees may be accredited
|
||||
- C. Technician only
|
||||
- D. Amateur Extra, General, and Technician
|
||||
- [[G1D03]] (C) [97.9(b)]
|
||||
On which of the following band segments may you operate if you are a Technician class operator and have an unexpired Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class privileges?
|
||||
- A. Only the Technician band segments until your upgrade is posted in the FCC database
|
||||
- B. Only on the Technician band segments until you have a receipt for the FCC application fee payment
|
||||
- C. On any General or Technician class band segment
|
||||
- D. On any General or Technician class band segment except 30 meters and 60 meters
|
||||
- [[G1D04]] (A) [97.509(3)(i)(c)]
|
||||
Who must observe the administration of a Technician class license examination?
|
||||
- A. At least three Volunteer Examiners of General class or higher
|
||||
- B. At least two Volunteer Examiners of General class or higher
|
||||
- C. At least two Volunteer Examiners of Technician class or higher
|
||||
- D. At least three Volunteer Examiners of Technician class
|
||||
- [[G1D05]] (A) [97.7]
|
||||
When operating a US station by remote control from outside the country, what license is required of the control operator?
|
||||
- A. A US operator/primary station license
|
||||
- B. Only an appropriate US operator/primary license and a special remote station permit from the FCC
|
||||
- C. Only a license from the foreign country, as long as the call sign includes identification of portable operation in the US
|
||||
- D. A license from the foreign country and a special remote station permit from the FCC
|
||||
- [[G1D06]] (A) [97.119(f)(2)]
|
||||
Until an upgrade to General class is shown in the FCC database, when must a Technician licensee identify with “AG” after their call sign?
|
||||
- A. Whenever they operate using General class frequency privileges
|
||||
- B. Whenever they operate on any amateur frequency
|
||||
- C. Whenever they operate using Technician frequency privileges
|
||||
- D. A special identifier is not required if their General class license application has been filed with the FCC
|
||||
- [[G1D07]] (C) [97.509(b)(1)]
|
||||
Volunteer Examiners are accredited by what organization?
|
||||
- A. The Federal Communications Commission
|
||||
- B. The Universal Licensing System
|
||||
- C. A Volunteer Examiner Coordinator
|
||||
- D. The Wireless Telecommunications Bureau
|
||||
- [[G1D08]] (B) [97.509(b)(3)]
|
||||
Which of the following criteria must be met for a non-US citizen to be an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
|
||||
- A. The person must be a resident of the US for a minimum of 5 years
|
||||
- B. The person must hold an FCC granted amateur radio license of General class or above
|
||||
- C. The person’s home citizenship must be in ITU region 2
|
||||
- D. None of these choices is correct; a non-US citizen cannot be a Volunteer Examiner
|
||||
- [[G1D09]] (C) [97.9(b)]
|
||||
How long is a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) valid for exam element credit?
|
||||
- A. 30 days
|
||||
- B. 180 days
|
||||
- C. 365 days
|
||||
- D. For as long as your current license is valid
|
||||
- [[G1D10]] (B) [97.509(b)(2)]
|
||||
What is the minimum age that one must be to qualify as an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
|
||||
- A. 16 years
|
||||
- B. 18 years
|
||||
- C. 21 years
|
||||
- D. There is no age limit
|
||||
- [[G1D11]] (D) [97.505]
|
||||
What action is required to obtain a new General class license after a previously held license has expired and the two-year grace period has passed?
|
||||
- A. They must have a letter from the FCC showing they once held an amateur or commercial license
|
||||
- B. There are no requirements other than being able to show a copy of the expired license
|
||||
- C. Contact the FCC to have the license reinstated
|
||||
- D. The applicant must show proof of the appropriate expired license grant and pass the current Element 2 exam
|
||||
- [[G1D12]] (C) [97.507]
|
||||
When operating a station in South America by remote control over the internet from the US, what regulations apply?
|
||||
- A. Those of both the remote station’s country and the FCC
|
||||
- B. Those of the remote station’s country and the FCC’s third-party regulations
|
||||
- C. Only those of the remote station’s country
|
||||
- D. Only those of the FCC
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G1E/2025-05-01T18_48_55.959Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G1E/2025-05-01T18_48_55.959Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G1E – Control categories; repeater regulations; third-party rules; ITU regions; automatically controlled digital station
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1E01]] (A) [97.115(b)(2)]
|
||||
Which of the following would disqualify a third party from participating in sending a message via an amateur station?
|
||||
- A. The third party’s amateur license has been revoked and not reinstated
|
||||
- B. The third party is not a US citizen
|
||||
- C. The third party is speaking in a language other than English
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E02]] (D) [97.205(b)]
|
||||
When may a 10-meter repeater retransmit the 2-meter signal from a station that has a Technician class control operator?
|
||||
- A. Under no circumstances
|
||||
- B. Only if the station on 10-meters is operating under a Special Temporary Authorization allowing such retransmission
|
||||
- C. Only during an FCC-declared general state of communications emergency
|
||||
- D. Only if the 10-meter repeater control operator holds at least a General class license
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E03]] (A) [97.221]
|
||||
What is required to conduct communications with a digital station operating under automatic control outside the automatic control band segments?
|
||||
- A. The station initiating the contact must be under local or remote control
|
||||
- B. The interrogating transmission must be made by another automatically controlled station
|
||||
- C. No third-party traffic may be transmitted
|
||||
- D. The control operator of the interrogating station must hold an Amateur Extra class license
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E04]] (D) [97.13(b), 97.303, 97.311(b)]
|
||||
Which of the following conditions require a licensed amateur radio operator to take specific steps to avoid harmful interference to other users or facilities?
|
||||
- A. When operating within one mile of an FCC Monitoring Station
|
||||
- B. When using a band where the Amateur Service is secondary
|
||||
- C. When a station is transmitting spread spectrum emissions
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E05]] (C) [97.115(a)(2), 97.117]
|
||||
What are the restrictions on messages sent to a third party in a country with which there is a Third-Party Agreement?
|
||||
- A. They must relate to emergencies or disaster relief
|
||||
- B. They must be for other licensed amateurs
|
||||
- C. They must relate to amateur radio, or remarks of a personal character, or messages relating to emergencies or disaster relief
|
||||
- D. The message must be limited to no longer than 1 minute in duration and the name of the third party must be recorded in the station log
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E06]] (C) [97.301, ITU Radio Regulations]
|
||||
The frequency allocations of which ITU region apply to radio amateurs operating in North and South America?
|
||||
- A. Region 4
|
||||
- B. Region 3
|
||||
- C. Region 2
|
||||
- D. Region 1
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E07]] (D) [97.111]
|
||||
In what part of the 2.4 GHz band may an amateur station communicate with non-licensed Wi-Fi stations?
|
||||
- A. Anywhere in the band
|
||||
- B. Channels 1 through 4
|
||||
- C. Channels 42 through 45
|
||||
- D. No part
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E08]] (B) [97.313(j)]
|
||||
What is the maximum PEP output allowed for spread spectrum transmissions?
|
||||
- A. 100 milliwatts
|
||||
- B. 10 watts
|
||||
- C. 100 watts
|
||||
- D. 1500 watts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E09]] (A) [97.115]
|
||||
Under what circumstances are messages that are sent via digital modes exempt from Part 97 third-party rules that apply to other modes of communication?
|
||||
- A. Under no circumstances
|
||||
- B. When messages are encrypted
|
||||
- C. When messages are not encrypted
|
||||
- D. When under automatic control
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E10]] (A) [97.101]
|
||||
Why should an amateur operator normally avoid transmitting on 14.100, 18.110, 21.150, 24.930 and 28.200 MHz?
|
||||
- A. A system of propagation beacon stations operates on those frequencies
|
||||
- B. A system of automatic digital stations operates on those frequencies
|
||||
- C. These frequencies are set aside for emergency operations
|
||||
- D. These frequencies are set aside for bulletins from the FCC
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E11]] (D) [97.221, 97.305]
|
||||
On what bands may automatically controlled stations transmitting RTTY or data emissions communicate with other automatically controlled digital stations?
|
||||
- A. On any band segment where digital operation is permitted
|
||||
- B. Anywhere in the non-phone segments of the 10-meter or shorter wavelength bands
|
||||
- C. Only in the non-phone Extra Class segments of the bands
|
||||
- D. Anywhere in the 6-meter or shorter wavelength bands, and in limited segments of some of the HF bands
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G1E12]] (A) [97.115]
|
||||
When may third-party messages be transmitted via remote control?
|
||||
- A. Under any circumstances in which third party messages are permitted by FCC rules
|
||||
- B. Under no circumstances except for emergencies
|
||||
- C. Only when the message is intended for licensed radio amateurs
|
||||
- D. Only when the message is intended for third parties in areas where licensing is controlled by the FCC
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G2A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.964Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G2A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.964Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G2A – Phone operating procedures: USB/LSB conventions, breaking into a contact, transmitter setup for voice operation; answering DX stations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2A01]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on frequencies of 14 MHz or higher?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A02]] (B)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter bands?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A03]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for SSB voice communications in the VHF and UHF bands?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A04]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 17- and 12-meter bands?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A05]] (C)
|
||||
Which mode of voice communication is most commonly used on the HF amateur bands?
|
||||
- A. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- B. Double sideband
|
||||
- C. Single sideband
|
||||
- D. Single phase modulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A06]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of using single sideband, as compared to other analog voice modes on the HF amateur bands?
|
||||
- A. Very high-fidelity voice modulation
|
||||
- B. Less subject to interference from atmospheric static crashes
|
||||
- C. Ease of tuning on receive and immunity to impulse noise
|
||||
- D. Less bandwidth used and greater power efficiency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true of single sideband (SSB)?
|
||||
- A. Only one sideband and the carrier are transmitted; the other sideband is suppressed
|
||||
- B. Only one sideband is transmitted; the other sideband and carrier are suppressed
|
||||
- C. SSB is the only voice mode authorized on the 20-, 15-, and 10-meter amateur bands
|
||||
- D. SSB is the only voice mode authorized on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter amateur bands
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A08]] (B)
|
||||
What is the recommended way to break into a phone contact?
|
||||
- A. Say “QRZ” several times, followed by your call sign
|
||||
- B. Say your call sign once
|
||||
- C. Say “Breaker Breaker”
|
||||
- D. Say “CQ” followed by the call sign of either station
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A09]] (D)
|
||||
Why do most amateur stations use lower sideband on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter bands?
|
||||
- A. Lower sideband is more efficient than upper sideband at these frequencies
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband is the only sideband legal on these frequency bands
|
||||
- C. Because it is fully compatible with an AM detector
|
||||
- D. It is commonly accepted amateur practice
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true of VOX operation versus PTT operation?
|
||||
- A. The received signal is more natural sounding
|
||||
- B. It allows “hands free” operation
|
||||
- C. It occupies less bandwidth
|
||||
- D. It provides more power output
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A11]] (C)
|
||||
Generally, who should respond to a station in the contiguous 48 states calling “CQ DX”?
|
||||
- A. Any caller is welcome to respond
|
||||
- B. Only stations in Germany
|
||||
- C. Any stations outside the lower 48 states
|
||||
- D. Only contest stations
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2A12]] (B)
|
||||
What control is typically adjusted for proper ALC setting on a single sideband transceiver?
|
||||
- A. RF clipping level
|
||||
- B. Transmit audio or microphone gain
|
||||
- C. Antenna inductance or capacitance
|
||||
- D. Attenuator level
|
74
logseq/bak/pages/G2A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.565Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
74
logseq/bak/pages/G2A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.565Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G2A – Phone operating procedures: USB/LSB conventions, breaking into a contact, transmitter setup for voice operation; answering DX stations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2A01]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on frequencies of 14 MHz or higher?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A02]] (B)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter bands?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A03]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for SSB voice communications in the VHF and UHF bands?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A04]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 17- and 12-meter bands?
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A05]] (C)
|
||||
Which mode of voice communication is most commonly used on the HF amateur bands?
|
||||
- A. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- B. Double sideband
|
||||
- C. Single sideband
|
||||
- D. Single phase modulation
|
||||
- [[G2A06]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of using single sideband, as compared to other analog voice modes on the HF amateur bands?
|
||||
- A. Very high-fidelity voice modulation
|
||||
- B. Less subject to interference from atmospheric static crashes
|
||||
- C. Ease of tuning on receive and immunity to impulse noise
|
||||
- D. Less bandwidth used and greater power efficiency
|
||||
- [[G2A07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true of single sideband (SSB)?
|
||||
- A. Only one sideband and the carrier are transmitted; the other sideband is suppressed
|
||||
- B. Only one sideband is transmitted; the other sideband and carrier are suppressed
|
||||
- C. SSB is the only voice mode authorized on the 20-, 15-, and 10-meter amateur bands
|
||||
- D. SSB is the only voice mode authorized on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter amateur bands
|
||||
- [[G2A08]] (B)
|
||||
What is the recommended way to break into a phone contact?
|
||||
- A. Say “QRZ” several times, followed by your call sign
|
||||
- B. Say your call sign once
|
||||
- C. Say “Breaker Breaker”
|
||||
- D. Say “CQ” followed by the call sign of either station
|
||||
- [[G2A09]] (D)
|
||||
Why do most amateur stations use lower sideband on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter bands?
|
||||
- A. Lower sideband is more efficient than upper sideband at these frequencies
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband is the only sideband legal on these frequency bands
|
||||
- C. Because it is fully compatible with an AM detector
|
||||
- D. It is commonly accepted amateur practice
|
||||
- [[G2A10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true of VOX operation versus PTT operation?
|
||||
- A. The received signal is more natural sounding
|
||||
- B. It allows “hands free” operation
|
||||
- C. It occupies less bandwidth
|
||||
- D. It provides more power output
|
||||
- [[G2A11]] (C)
|
||||
Generally, who should respond to a station in the contiguous 48 states calling “CQ DX”?
|
||||
- A. Any caller is welcome to respond
|
||||
- B. Only stations in Germany
|
||||
- C. Any stations outside the lower 48 states
|
||||
- D. Only contest stations
|
||||
- [[G2A12]] (B)
|
||||
What control is typically adjusted for proper ALC setting on a single sideband transceiver?
|
||||
- A. RF clipping level
|
||||
- B. Transmit audio or microphone gain
|
||||
- C. Antenna inductance or capacitance
|
||||
- D. Attenuator level
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G2B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.965Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G2B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.965Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G2B – Operating effectively; band plans; drills and emergencies; RACES operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2B01]] (C) [97.101(b), (c)]
|
||||
Which of the following is true concerning access to frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Nets have priority
|
||||
- B. QSOs in progress have priority
|
||||
- C. Except during emergencies, no amateur station has priority access to any frequency
|
||||
- D. Contest operations should yield to non-contest use of frequencies
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the first thing you should do if you are communicating with another amateur station and hear a station in distress break in?
|
||||
- A. Inform your local emergency coordinator
|
||||
- B. Acknowledge the station in distress and determine what assistance may be needed
|
||||
- C. Immediately decrease power to avoid interfering with the station in distress
|
||||
- D. Immediately cease all transmissions
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B03]] (C)
|
||||
What is good amateur practice if propagation changes during a contact creating interference from other stations using the frequency?
|
||||
- A. Advise the interfering stations that you are on the frequency and that you have priority
|
||||
- B. Decrease power and continue to transmit
|
||||
- C. Attempt to resolve the interference problem with the other stations in a mutually acceptable manner
|
||||
- D. Switch to the opposite sideband
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B04]] (B)
|
||||
When selecting a CW transmitting frequency, what minimum separation from other stations should be used to minimize interference to stations on adjacent frequencies?
|
||||
- A. 5 Hz to 50 Hz
|
||||
- B. 150 Hz to 500 Hz
|
||||
- C. 1 kHz to 3 kHz
|
||||
- D. 3 kHz to 6 kHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B05]] (C)
|
||||
When selecting an SSB transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to stations on adjacent frequencies?
|
||||
- A. 5 Hz to 50 Hz
|
||||
- B. 150 Hz to 500 Hz
|
||||
- C. 2 kHz to 3 kHz
|
||||
- D. Approximately 6 kHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B06]] (A)
|
||||
How can you avoid harmful interference on an apparently clear frequency before calling CQ on CW or phone?
|
||||
- A. Send “QRL?” on CW, followed by your call sign; or, if using phone, ask if the frequency is in use, followed by your call sign
|
||||
- B. Listen for 2 minutes before calling CQ
|
||||
- C. Send the letter “V” in Morse code several times and listen for a response, or say “test” several times and listen for a response
|
||||
- D. Send “QSY” on CW or if using phone, announce “the frequency is in use,” then give your call sign and listen for a response
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B07]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following complies with commonly accepted amateur practice when choosing a frequency on which to initiate a call?
|
||||
- A. Listen on the frequency for at least two minutes to be sure it is clear
|
||||
- B. Identify your station by transmitting your call sign at least 3 times
|
||||
- C. Follow the voluntary band plan
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B08]] (A)
|
||||
What is the voluntary band plan restriction for US stations transmitting within the 48 contiguous states in the 50.1 MHz to 50.125 MHz band segment?
|
||||
- A. Only contacts with stations not within the 48 contiguous states
|
||||
- B. Only contacts with other stations within the 48 contiguous states
|
||||
- C. Only digital contacts
|
||||
- D. Only SSTV contacts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B09]] (A) [97.407(a)]
|
||||
Who may be the control operator of an amateur station transmitting in RACES to assist relief operations during a disaster?
|
||||
- A. Only a person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license
|
||||
- B. Only a RACES net control operator
|
||||
- C. A person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license or an appropriate government official
|
||||
- D. Any control operator when normal communication systems are operational
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following is good amateur practice for net management?
|
||||
- A. Always use multiple sets of phonetics during check-in
|
||||
- B. Have a backup frequency in case of interference or poor conditions
|
||||
- C. Transmit the full net roster at the beginning of every session
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2B11]] (C) [97.407(d)(4)]
|
||||
How often may RACES training drills and tests be routinely conducted without special authorization?
|
||||
- A. No more than 1 hour per month
|
||||
- B. No more than 2 hours per month
|
||||
- C. No more than 1 hour per week
|
||||
- D. No more than 2 hours per week
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G2C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.967Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G2C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.967Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G2C – CW operating procedures and procedural signals; Q signals; full break-in
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2C01]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following describes full break-in CW operation (QSK)?
|
||||
- A. Breaking stations send the Morse code prosign “BK”
|
||||
- B. Automatic keyers, instead of hand keys, are used to send Morse code
|
||||
- C. An operator must activate a manual send/receive switch before and after every transmission
|
||||
- D. Transmitting stations can receive between code characters and elements
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C02]] (A)
|
||||
What should you do if a CW station sends “QRS?”
|
||||
- A. Send slower
|
||||
- B. Change frequency
|
||||
- C. Increase your power
|
||||
- D. Repeat everything twice
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C03]] (C)
|
||||
What does it mean when a CW operator sends “KN” at the end of a transmission?
|
||||
- A. No US stations should call
|
||||
- B. Operating full break-in
|
||||
- C. Listening only for a specific station or stations
|
||||
- D. Closing station now
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C04]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRL?” mean?
|
||||
- A. “Will you keep the frequency clear?”
|
||||
- B. “Are you operating full break-in?” or “Can you operate full break-in?”
|
||||
- C. “Are you listening only for a specific station?”
|
||||
- D. “Are you busy?” or “Is this frequency in use?”
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C05]] (B)
|
||||
What is the best speed to use when answering a CQ in Morse code?
|
||||
- A. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no slower than the CQ
|
||||
- B. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no faster than the CQ
|
||||
- C. At the standard calling speed of 10 wpm
|
||||
- D. At the standard calling speed of 5 wpm
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C06]] (D)
|
||||
What does the term “zero beat” mean in CW operation?
|
||||
- A. Matching the speed of the transmitting station
|
||||
- B. Operating split to avoid interference on frequency
|
||||
- C. Sending without error
|
||||
- D. Matching the transmit frequency to the frequency of a received signal
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C07]] (A)
|
||||
When sending CW, what does a “C” mean when added to the RST report?
|
||||
- A. Chirpy or unstable signal
|
||||
- B. Report was read from an S meter rather than estimated
|
||||
- C. 100 percent copy
|
||||
- D. Key clicks
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C08]] (C)
|
||||
What prosign is sent to indicate the end of a formal message when using CW?
|
||||
- A. SK
|
||||
- B. BK
|
||||
- C. AR
|
||||
- D. KN
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C09]] (C)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QSL” mean?
|
||||
- A. Send slower
|
||||
- B. We have already confirmed the contact
|
||||
- C. I have received and understood
|
||||
- D. We have worked before
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C10]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRN” mean?
|
||||
- A. Send more slowly
|
||||
- B. Stop sending
|
||||
- C. Zero beat my signal
|
||||
- D. I am troubled by static
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2C11]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRV” mean?
|
||||
- A. You are sending too fast
|
||||
- B. There is interference on the frequency
|
||||
- C. I am quitting for the day
|
||||
- D. I am ready to receive
|
68
logseq/bak/pages/G2C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.563Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
68
logseq/bak/pages/G2C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.563Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G2C – CW operating procedures and procedural signals; Q signals; full break-in
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2C01]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following describes full break-in CW operation (QSK)?
|
||||
- A. Breaking stations send the Morse code prosign “BK”
|
||||
- B. Automatic keyers, instead of hand keys, are used to send Morse code
|
||||
- C. An operator must activate a manual send/receive switch before and after every transmission
|
||||
- D. Transmitting stations can receive between code characters and elements
|
||||
- [[G2C02]] (A)
|
||||
What should you do if a CW station sends “QRS?”
|
||||
- A. Send slower
|
||||
- B. Change frequency
|
||||
- C. Increase your power
|
||||
- D. Repeat everything twice
|
||||
- [[G2C03]] (C)
|
||||
What does it mean when a CW operator sends “KN” at the end of a transmission?
|
||||
- A. No US stations should call
|
||||
- B. Operating full break-in
|
||||
- C. Listening only for a specific station or stations
|
||||
- D. Closing station now
|
||||
- [[G2C04]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRL?” mean?
|
||||
- A. “Will you keep the frequency clear?”
|
||||
- B. “Are you operating full break-in?” or “Can you operate full break-in?”
|
||||
- C. “Are you listening only for a specific station?”
|
||||
- D. “Are you busy?” or “Is this frequency in use?”
|
||||
- [[G2C05]] (B)
|
||||
What is the best speed to use when answering a CQ in Morse code?
|
||||
- A. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no slower than the CQ
|
||||
- B. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no faster than the CQ
|
||||
- C. At the standard calling speed of 10 wpm
|
||||
- D. At the standard calling speed of 5 wpm
|
||||
- [[G2C06]] (D)
|
||||
What does the term “zero beat” mean in CW operation?
|
||||
- A. Matching the speed of the transmitting station
|
||||
- B. Operating split to avoid interference on frequency
|
||||
- C. Sending without error
|
||||
- D. Matching the transmit frequency to the frequency of a received signal
|
||||
- [[G2C07]] (A)
|
||||
When sending CW, what does a “C” mean when added to the RST report?
|
||||
- A. Chirpy or unstable signal
|
||||
- B. Report was read from an S meter rather than estimated
|
||||
- C. 100 percent copy
|
||||
- D. Key clicks
|
||||
- [[G2C08]] (C)
|
||||
What prosign is sent to indicate the end of a formal message when using CW?
|
||||
- A. SK
|
||||
- B. BK
|
||||
- C. AR
|
||||
- D. KN
|
||||
- [[G2C09]] (C)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QSL” mean?
|
||||
- A. Send slower
|
||||
- B. We have already confirmed the contact
|
||||
- C. I have received and understood
|
||||
- D. We have worked before
|
||||
- [[G2C10]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRN” mean?
|
||||
- A. Send more slowly
|
||||
- B. Stop sending
|
||||
- C. Zero beat my signal
|
||||
- D. I am troubled by static
|
||||
- [[G2C11]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRV” mean?
|
||||
- A. You are sending too fast
|
||||
- B. There is interference on the frequency
|
||||
- C. I am quitting for the day
|
||||
- D. I am ready to receive
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G2D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.962Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G2D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.962Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G2D – Volunteer Monitor Program; HF operations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2D01]] (A)
|
||||
What is the Volunteer Monitor Program?
|
||||
- A. Amateur volunteers who are formally enlisted to monitor the airwaves for rules violations
|
||||
- B. Amateur volunteers who conduct amateur licensing examinations
|
||||
- C. Amateur volunteers who conduct frequency coordination for amateur VHF repeaters
|
||||
- D. Amateur volunteers who use their station equipment to help civil defense organizations in times of emergency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are objectives of the Volunteer Monitor Program?
|
||||
- A. To conduct efficient and orderly amateur licensing examinations
|
||||
- B. To provide emergency and public safety communications
|
||||
- C. To coordinate repeaters for efficient and orderly spectrum usage
|
||||
- D. To encourage amateur radio operators to self-regulate and comply with the rules
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D03]] (B)
|
||||
What procedure may be used by Volunteer Monitors to localize a station whose continuous carrier is holding a repeater on in their area?
|
||||
- A. Compare vertical and horizontal signal strengths on the input frequency
|
||||
- B. Compare beam headings on the repeater input from their home locations with that of other Volunteer Monitors
|
||||
- C. Compare signal strengths between the input and output of the repeater
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D04]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes an azimuthal projection map?
|
||||
- A. A map that shows accurate land masses
|
||||
- B. A map that shows true bearings and distances from a specific location
|
||||
- C. A map that shows the angle at which an amateur satellite crosses the equator
|
||||
- D. A map that shows the number of degrees longitude that an amateur satellite appears to move westward at the equator with each orbit
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D05]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following indicates that you are looking for an HF contact with any station?
|
||||
- A. Sign your call sign once, followed by the words “listening for a call” -- if no answer, change frequency and repeat
|
||||
- B. Say “QTC” followed by “this is” and your call sign -- if no answer, change frequency and repeat
|
||||
- C. Repeat “CQ” a few times, followed by “this is,” then your call sign a few times, then pause to listen, repeat as necessary
|
||||
- D. Transmit an unmodulated carried for approximately 10 seconds, followed by “this is” and your call sign, and pause to listen -- repeat as necessary
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D06]] (C)
|
||||
How is a directional antenna pointed when making a “long-path” contact with another station?
|
||||
- A. Toward the rising sun
|
||||
- B. Along the gray line
|
||||
- C. 180 degrees from the station’s short-path heading
|
||||
- D. Toward the north
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are examples of the NATO Phonetic Alphabet?
|
||||
- A. Able, Baker, Charlie, Dog
|
||||
- B. Adam, Boy, Charles, David
|
||||
- C. America, Boston, Canada, Denmark
|
||||
- D. Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, Delta
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D08]] (D)
|
||||
Why do many amateurs keep a station log?
|
||||
- A. The FCC requires a log of all international contacts
|
||||
- B. The FCC requires a log of all international third-party traffic
|
||||
- C. The log provides evidence of operation needed to renew a license without retest
|
||||
- D. To help with a reply if the FCC requests information about your station
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D09]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is required when participating in a contest on HF frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Submit a log to the contest sponsor
|
||||
- B. Send a QSL card to the stations worked, or QSL via Logbook of The World
|
||||
- C. Identify your station according to normal FCC regulations
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D10]] (B)
|
||||
What is QRP operation?
|
||||
- A. Remote piloted model control
|
||||
- B. Low-power transmit operation
|
||||
- C. Transmission using Quick Response Protocol
|
||||
- D. Traffic relay procedure net operation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2D11]] (A)
|
||||
Why are signal reports typically exchanged at the beginning of an HF contact?
|
||||
- A. To allow each station to operate according to conditions
|
||||
- B. To be sure the contact will count for award programs
|
||||
- C. To follow standard radiogram structure
|
||||
- D. To allow each station to calibrate their frequency display
|
65
logseq/bak/pages/G2D/2025-05-01T18_49_27.565Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
65
logseq/bak/pages/G2D/2025-05-01T18_49_27.565Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
|
||||
G2D – Volunteer Monitor Program; HF operations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2D01]] (A)
|
||||
What is the Volunteer Monitor Program?
|
||||
- A. Amateur volunteers who are formally enlisted to monitor the airwaves for rules violations
|
||||
- B. Amateur volunteers who conduct amateur licensing examinations
|
||||
- C. Amateur volunteers who conduct frequency coordination for amateur VHF repeaters
|
||||
- D. Amateur volunteers who use their station equipment to help civil defense organizations in times of emergency
|
||||
- [[G2D02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are objectives of the Volunteer Monitor Program?
|
||||
- A. To conduct efficient and orderly amateur licensing examinations
|
||||
- B. To provide emergency and public safety communications
|
||||
- C. To coordinate repeaters for efficient and orderly spectrum usage
|
||||
- D. To encourage amateur radio operators to self-regulate and comply with the rules
|
||||
- [[G2D03]] (B)
|
||||
What procedure may be used by Volunteer Monitors to localize a station whose continuous carrier is holding a repeater on in their area?
|
||||
- A. Compare vertical and horizontal signal strengths on the input frequency
|
||||
- B. Compare beam headings on the repeater input from their home locations with that of other Volunteer Monitors
|
||||
- C. Compare signal strengths between the input and output of the repeater
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2D04]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes an azimuthal projection map?
|
||||
- A. A map that shows accurate land masses
|
||||
- B. A map that shows true bearings and distances from a specific location
|
||||
- C. A map that shows the angle at which an amateur satellite crosses the equator
|
||||
- D. A map that shows the number of degrees longitude that an amateur satellite appears to move westward at the equator with each orbit
|
||||
- [[G2D05]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following indicates that you are looking for an HF contact with any station?
|
||||
- C. Repeat “CQ” a few times, followed by “this is,” then your call sign a few times, then pause to listen, repeat as necessary
|
||||
- [[G2D06]] (C)
|
||||
How is a directional antenna pointed when making a “long-path” contact with another station?
|
||||
- A. Toward the rising sun
|
||||
- B. Along the gray line
|
||||
- C. 180 degrees from the station’s short-path heading
|
||||
- D. Toward the north
|
||||
- [[G2D07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are examples of the NATO Phonetic Alphabet?
|
||||
- A. Able, Baker, Charlie, Dog
|
||||
- B. Adam, Boy, Charles, David
|
||||
- C. America, Boston, Canada, Denmark
|
||||
- D. Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, Delta
|
||||
- [[G2D08]] (D)
|
||||
Why do many amateurs keep a station log?
|
||||
- A. The FCC requires a log of all international contacts
|
||||
- B. The FCC requires a log of all international third-party traffic
|
||||
- C. The log provides evidence of operation needed to renew a license without retest
|
||||
- D. To help with a reply if the FCC requests information about your station
|
||||
- [[G2D09]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is required when participating in a contest on HF frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Submit a log to the contest sponsor
|
||||
- B. Send a QSL card to the stations worked, or QSL via Logbook of The World
|
||||
- C. Identify your station according to normal FCC regulations
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2D10]] (B)
|
||||
What is QRP operation?
|
||||
- A. Remote piloted model control
|
||||
- B. Low-power transmit operation
|
||||
- C. Transmission using Quick Response Protocol
|
||||
- D. Traffic relay procedure net operation
|
||||
- [[G2D11]] (A)
|
||||
Why are signal reports typically exchanged at the beginning of an HF contact?
|
||||
- A. To allow each station to operate according to conditions
|
||||
- B. To be sure the contact will count for award programs
|
||||
- C. To follow standard radiogram structure
|
||||
- D. To allow each station to calibrate their frequency display
|
106
logseq/bak/pages/G2E/2025-05-01T18_48_55.961Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
106
logseq/bak/pages/G2E/2025-05-01T18_48_55.961Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
|
||||
G2E – Digital mode operating procedures
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2E01]] (D)
|
||||
Which mode is normally used when sending RTTY signals via AFSK with an SSB transmitter?
|
||||
- A. USB
|
||||
- B. DSB
|
||||
- C. CW
|
||||
- D. LSB
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E02]] (B)
|
||||
What is VARA?
|
||||
- A. A low signal-to-noise digital mode used for EME (moonbounce)
|
||||
- B. A digital protocol used with Winlink
|
||||
- C. A radio direction finding system used on VHF and UHF
|
||||
- D.A DX spotting system using a network of software defined radios
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E03]] (D)
|
||||
What symptoms may result from other signals interfering with a PACTOR or VARA transmission?
|
||||
- A. Frequent retries or timeouts
|
||||
- B. Long pauses in message transmission
|
||||
- C. Failure to establish a connection between stations
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E04]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is good practice when choosing a transmitting frequency to answer a station calling CQ using FT8?
|
||||
- A. Always call on the station’s frequency
|
||||
- B. Call on any frequency in the waterfall except the station’s frequency
|
||||
- C. Find a clear frequency during the same time slot as the calling station
|
||||
- D. Find a clear frequency during the alternate time slot to the calling station
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E05]] (B)
|
||||
What is the standard sideband for JT65, JT9, FT4, or FT8 digital signal when using AFSK?
|
||||
- A. LSB
|
||||
- B. USB
|
||||
- C. DSB
|
||||
- D. SSB
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E06]] (B)
|
||||
What is the most common frequency shift for RTTY emissions in the amateur HF bands?
|
||||
- A. 85 Hz
|
||||
- B. 170 Hz
|
||||
- C. 425 Hz
|
||||
- D. 850 Hz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following is required when using FT8?
|
||||
- A. A special hardware modem
|
||||
- B. Computer time accurate to within approximately 1 second
|
||||
- C. Receiver attenuator set to -12 dB
|
||||
- D. A vertically polarized antenna
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E08]] (D)
|
||||
In what segment of the 20-meter band are most digital mode operations commonly found?
|
||||
- A. At the bottom of the slow-scan TV segment, near 14.230 MHz
|
||||
- B. At the top of the SSB phone segment, near 14.325 MHz
|
||||
- C. In the middle of the CW segment, near 14.100 MHz
|
||||
- D. Between 14.070 MHz and 14.100 MHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E09]] (C)
|
||||
How do you join a contact between two stations using the PACTOR protocol?
|
||||
- A. Send broadcast packets containing your call sign while in MONITOR mode
|
||||
- B. Transmit a steady carrier until the PACTOR protocol times out and disconnects
|
||||
- C. Joining an existing contact is not possible, PACTOR connections are limited to two stations
|
||||
- D. Send a NAK code
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E10]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is a way to establish contact with a digital messaging system gateway station?
|
||||
- A. Send an email to the system control operator
|
||||
- B. Send QRL in Morse code
|
||||
- C. Respond when the station broadcasts its SSID
|
||||
- D. Transmit a connect message on the station’s published frequency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E11]] (C)
|
||||
What is the primary purpose of an Amateur Radio Emergency Data Network (AREDN) mesh network?
|
||||
- A. To provide FM repeater coverage in remote areas
|
||||
- B. To provide real time propagation data by monitoring amateur radio transmissions worldwide
|
||||
- C. To provide high-speed data services during an emergency or community event
|
||||
- D. To provide DX spotting reports to aid contesters and DXers
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E12]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following describes Winlink?
|
||||
- A. An amateur radio wireless network to send and receive email on the internet
|
||||
- B. A form of Packet Radio
|
||||
- C. A wireless network capable of both VHF and HF band operation
|
||||
- D. All of the above
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E13]] (B)
|
||||
What is another name for a Winlink Remote Message Server?
|
||||
- A. Terminal Node Controller
|
||||
- B. Gateway
|
||||
- C. RJ-45
|
||||
- D. Printer/Server
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E14]] (D)
|
||||
What could be wrong if you cannot decode an RTTY or other FSK signal even though it is apparently tuned in properly?
|
||||
- A. The mark and space frequencies may be reversed
|
||||
- B. You may have selected the wrong baud rate
|
||||
- C. You may be listening on the wrong sideband
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G2E15]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is a common location for FT8?
|
||||
- A. Anywhere in the voice portion of the band
|
||||
- B. Anywhere in the CW portion of the band
|
||||
- C. Approximately 14.074 MHz to 14.077 MHz
|
||||
- D. Approximately 14.110 MHz to 14.113 MHz
|
99
logseq/bak/pages/G3A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.962Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
99
logseq/bak/pages/G3A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.962Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
|
||||
G3A – Sunspots and solar radiation; geomagnetic field and stability indices
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G3A01]] (A)
|
||||
How does a higher sunspot number affect HF propagation?
|
||||
- A. Higher sunspot numbers generally indicate a greater probability of good propagation at higher frequencies
|
||||
- B. Lower sunspot numbers generally indicate greater probability of sporadic E propagation
|
||||
- C. A zero sunspot number indicates that radio propagation is not possible on any band
|
||||
- D. A zero sunspot number indicates undisturbed conditions
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A02]] (B)
|
||||
What effect does a sudden ionospheric disturbance have on the daytime ionospheric propagation?
|
||||
- A. It enhances propagation on all HF frequencies
|
||||
- B. It disrupts signals on lower frequencies more than those on higher frequencies
|
||||
- C. It disrupts communications via satellite more than direct communications
|
||||
- D. None, because only areas on the night side of the Earth are affected
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A03]] (C)
|
||||
Approximately how long does it take the increased ultraviolet and X-ray radiation from a solar flare to affect radio propagation on Earth?
|
||||
- A. 28 days
|
||||
- B. 1 to 2 hours
|
||||
- C. 8 minutes
|
||||
- D. 20 to 40 hours
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A04]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are the least reliable bands for long-distance communications during periods of low solar activity?
|
||||
- A. 80 meters and 160 meters
|
||||
- B. 60 meters and 40 meters
|
||||
- C. 30 meters and 20 meters
|
||||
- D. 15 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A05]] (D)
|
||||
What is the solar flux index?
|
||||
- A. A measure of the highest frequency that is useful for ionospheric propagation between two points on Earth
|
||||
- B. A count of sunspots that is adjusted for solar emissions
|
||||
- C. Another name for the American sunspot number
|
||||
- D. A measure of solar radiation with a wavelength of 10.7 centimeters
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A06]] (D)
|
||||
What is a geomagnetic storm?
|
||||
- A. A sudden drop in the solar flux index
|
||||
- B. A thunderstorm that affects radio propagation
|
||||
- C. Ripples in the geomagnetic force
|
||||
- D. A temporary disturbance in Earth’s geomagnetic field
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A07]] (D)
|
||||
At what point in the solar cycle does the 20-meter band usually support worldwide propagation during daylight hours?
|
||||
- A. At the summer solstice
|
||||
- B. Only at the maximum point
|
||||
- C. Only at the minimum point
|
||||
- D. At any point
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A08]] (D)
|
||||
How can a geomagnetic storm affect HF propagation?
|
||||
- A. Improve high-latitude HF propagation
|
||||
- B. Degrade ground wave propagation
|
||||
- C. Improve ground wave propagation
|
||||
- D. Degrade high-latitude HF propagation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A09]] (A)
|
||||
How can high geomagnetic activity benefit radio communications?
|
||||
- A. Creates auroras that can reflect VHF signals
|
||||
- B. Increases signal strength for HF signals passing through the polar regions
|
||||
- C. Improve HF long path propagation
|
||||
- D. Reduce long delayed echoes
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A10]] (C)
|
||||
What causes HF propagation conditions to vary periodically in a 26- to 28-day cycle?
|
||||
- A. Long term oscillations in the upper atmosphere
|
||||
- B. Cyclic variation in Earth’s radiation belts
|
||||
- C. Rotation of the Sun’s surface layers around its axis
|
||||
- D. The position of the Moon in its orbit
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A11]] (D)
|
||||
How long does it take a coronal mass ejection to affect radio propagation on Earth?
|
||||
- A. 28 days
|
||||
- B. 14 days
|
||||
- C. 4 to 8 minutes
|
||||
- D. 15 hours to several days
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A12]] (B)
|
||||
What does the K-index measure?
|
||||
- A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the Sun
|
||||
- B. The short-term stability of Earth’s geomagnetic field
|
||||
- C. The short-term stability of the Sun’s magnetic field
|
||||
- D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A13]] (C)
|
||||
What does the A-index measure?
|
||||
- A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the Sun
|
||||
- B. The amount of polarization of the Sun’s electric field
|
||||
- C. The long-term stability of Earth’s geomagnetic field
|
||||
- D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3A14]] (B)
|
||||
How is long distance radio communication usually affected by the charged particles that reach Earth from solar coronal holes?
|
||||
- A. HF communication is improved
|
||||
- B. HF communication is disturbed
|
||||
- C. VHF/UHF ducting is improved
|
||||
- D. VHF/UHF ducting is disturbed
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G3B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.966Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G3B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.966Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G3B – Maximum Usable Frequency; Lowest Usable Frequency; short path and long path propagation; determining propagation conditions; ionospheric refraction
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G3B01]] (D)
|
||||
What is a characteristic of skywave signals arriving at your location by both short-path and long-path propagation?
|
||||
- A. Periodic fading approximately every 10 seconds
|
||||
- B. Signal strength increased by 3 dB
|
||||
- C. The signal might be cancelled causing severe attenuation
|
||||
- D. A slightly delayed echo might be heard
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B02]] (D)
|
||||
What factors affect the MUF?
|
||||
- A. Path distance and location
|
||||
- B. Time of day and season
|
||||
- C. Solar radiation and ionospheric disturbances
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B03]] (A)
|
||||
Which frequency will have the least attenuation for long-distance skip propagation?
|
||||
- A. Just below the MUF
|
||||
- B. Just above the LUF
|
||||
- C. Just below the critical frequency
|
||||
- D. Just above the critical frequency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B04]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is a way to determine current propagation on a desired band from your station?
|
||||
- A. Use a network of automated receiving stations on the internet to see where your transmissions are being received
|
||||
- B. Check the A-index
|
||||
- C. Send a series of dots and listen for echoes
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B05]] (A)
|
||||
How does the ionosphere affect radio waves with frequencies below the MUF and above the LUF?
|
||||
- A. They are refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- B. They pass through the ionosphere
|
||||
- C. They are amplified by interaction with the ionosphere
|
||||
- D. They are refracted and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B06]] (C)
|
||||
What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the LUF?
|
||||
- A. They are refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- B. They pass through the ionosphere
|
||||
- C. They are attenuated before reaching the destination
|
||||
- D. They are refracted and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B07]] (A)
|
||||
What does LUF stand for?
|
||||
- A. The Lowest Usable Frequency for communications between two specific points
|
||||
- B. Lowest Usable Frequency for communications to any point outside a 100-mile radius
|
||||
- C. The Lowest Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
|
||||
- D. Lowest Usable Frequency during the past 60 minutes
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B08]] (B)
|
||||
What does MUF stand for?
|
||||
- A. The Minimum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
|
||||
- B. The Maximum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
|
||||
- C. The Minimum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
|
||||
- D. The Maximum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B09]] (C)
|
||||
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface normally covered in one hop using the F2 region?
|
||||
- A. 180 miles
|
||||
- B. 1,200 miles
|
||||
- C. 2,500 miles
|
||||
- D. 12,000 miles
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B10]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface normally covered in one hop using the E region?
|
||||
- A. 180 miles
|
||||
- B. 1,200 miles
|
||||
- C. 2,500 miles
|
||||
- D. 12,000 miles
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B11]] (A)
|
||||
What happens to HF propagation when the LUF exceeds the MUF?
|
||||
- A. Propagation via ordinary skywave communications is not possible over that path
|
||||
- B. HF communications over the path are enhanced
|
||||
- C. Double-hop propagation along the path is more common
|
||||
- D. Propagation over the path on all HF frequencies is enhanced
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3B12]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is typical of the lower HF frequencies during the summer?
|
||||
- A. Poor propagation at any time of day
|
||||
- B. World-wide propagation during daylight hours
|
||||
- C. Heavy distortion on signals due to photon absorption
|
||||
- D. High levels of atmospheric noise or static
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G3C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.963Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G3C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.963Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G3C – Ionospheric regions; critical angle and frequency; HF scatter; near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS)
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G3C01]] (A)
|
||||
Which ionospheric region is closest to the surface of Earth?
|
||||
- A. The D region
|
||||
- B. The E region
|
||||
- C. The F1 region
|
||||
- D. The F2 region
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C02]] (A)
|
||||
What is meant by the term “critical frequency” at a given incidence angle?
|
||||
- A. The highest frequency which is refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- B. The lowest frequency which is refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- C. The frequency at which the signal-to-noise ratio approaches unity
|
||||
- D. The frequency at which the signal-to-noise ratio is 6 dB
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C03]] (C)
|
||||
Why is skip propagation via the F2 region longer than that via the other ionospheric regions?
|
||||
- A. Because it is the densest
|
||||
- B. Because of the Doppler effect
|
||||
- C. Because it is the highest
|
||||
- D. Because of temperature inversions
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C04]] (D)
|
||||
What does the term “critical angle” mean, as applied to radio wave propagation?
|
||||
- A. The long path azimuth of a distant station
|
||||
- B. The short path azimuth of a distant station
|
||||
- C. The lowest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
|
||||
- D. The highest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C05]] (C)
|
||||
Why is long-distance communication on the 40-, 60-, 80-, and 160-meter bands more difficult during the day?
|
||||
- A. The F region absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
|
||||
- B. The F region is unstable during daylight hours
|
||||
- C. The D region absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
|
||||
- D. The E region is unstable during daylight hours
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C06]] (B)
|
||||
What is a characteristic of HF scatter?
|
||||
- A. Phone signals have high intelligibility
|
||||
- B. Signals have a fluttering sound
|
||||
- C. There are very large, sudden swings in signal strength
|
||||
- D. Scatter propagation occurs only at night
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C07]] (D)
|
||||
What makes HF scatter signals often sound distorted?
|
||||
- A. The ionospheric region involved is unstable
|
||||
- B. Ground waves are absorbing much of the signal
|
||||
- C. The E region is not present
|
||||
- D. Energy is scattered into the skip zone through several different paths
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C08]] (A)
|
||||
Why are HF scatter signals in the skip zone usually weak?
|
||||
- A. Only a small part of the signal energy is scattered into the skip zone
|
||||
- B. Signals are scattered from the magnetosphere, which is not a good reflector
|
||||
- C. Propagation is via ground waves, which absorb most of the signal energy
|
||||
- D. Propagation is via ducts in the F region, which absorb most of the energy
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C09]] (B)
|
||||
What type of propagation allows signals to be heard in the transmitting station’s skip zone?
|
||||
- A. Faraday rotation
|
||||
- B. Scatter
|
||||
- C. Chordal hop
|
||||
- D. Short-path
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C10]] (B)
|
||||
What is near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS) propagation?
|
||||
- A. Propagation near the MUF
|
||||
- B. Short distance MF or HF propagation at high elevation angles
|
||||
- C. Long path HF propagation at sunrise and sunset
|
||||
- D. Double hop propagation near the LUF
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G3C11]] (D)
|
||||
Which ionospheric region is the most absorbent of signals below 10 MHz during daylight hours?
|
||||
- A. The F2 region
|
||||
- B. The F1 region
|
||||
- C. The E region
|
||||
- D. The D region
|
68
logseq/bak/pages/G3C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.567Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
68
logseq/bak/pages/G3C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.567Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G3C – Ionospheric regions; critical angle and frequency; HF scatter; near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS)
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G3C01]] (A)
|
||||
Which ionospheric region is closest to the surface of Earth?
|
||||
- A. The D region
|
||||
- B. The E region
|
||||
- C. The F1 region
|
||||
- D. The F2 region
|
||||
- [[G3C02]] (A)
|
||||
What is meant by the term “critical frequency” at a given incidence angle?
|
||||
- A. The highest frequency which is refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- B. The lowest frequency which is refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- C. The frequency at which the signal-to-noise ratio approaches unity
|
||||
- D. The frequency at which the signal-to-noise ratio is 6 dB
|
||||
- [[G3C03]] (C)
|
||||
Why is skip propagation via the F2 region longer than that via the other ionospheric regions?
|
||||
- A. Because it is the densest
|
||||
- B. Because of the Doppler effect
|
||||
- C. Because it is the highest
|
||||
- D. Because of temperature inversions
|
||||
- [[G3C04]] (D)
|
||||
What does the term “critical angle” mean, as applied to radio wave propagation?
|
||||
- A. The long path azimuth of a distant station
|
||||
- B. The short path azimuth of a distant station
|
||||
- C. The lowest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
|
||||
- D. The highest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
|
||||
- [[G3C05]] (C)
|
||||
Why is long-distance communication on the 40-, 60-, 80-, and 160-meter bands more difficult during the day?
|
||||
- A. The F region absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
|
||||
- B. The F region is unstable during daylight hours
|
||||
- C. The D region absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
|
||||
- D. The E region is unstable during daylight hours
|
||||
- [[G3C06]] (B)
|
||||
What is a characteristic of HF scatter?
|
||||
- A. Phone signals have high intelligibility
|
||||
- B. Signals have a fluttering sound
|
||||
- C. There are very large, sudden swings in signal strength
|
||||
- D. Scatter propagation occurs only at night
|
||||
- [[G3C07]] (D)
|
||||
What makes HF scatter signals often sound distorted?
|
||||
- A. The ionospheric region involved is unstable
|
||||
- B. Ground waves are absorbing much of the signal
|
||||
- C. The E region is not present
|
||||
- D. Energy is scattered into the skip zone through several different paths
|
||||
- [[G3C08]] (A)
|
||||
Why are HF scatter signals in the skip zone usually weak?
|
||||
- A. Only a small part of the signal energy is scattered into the skip zone
|
||||
- B. Signals are scattered from the magnetosphere, which is not a good reflector
|
||||
- C. Propagation is via ground waves, which absorb most of the signal energy
|
||||
- D. Propagation is via ducts in the F region, which absorb most of the energy
|
||||
- [[G3C09]] (B)
|
||||
What type of propagation allows signals to be heard in the transmitting station’s skip zone?
|
||||
- A. Faraday rotation
|
||||
- B. Scatter
|
||||
- C. Chordal hop
|
||||
- D. Short-path
|
||||
- [[G3C10]] (B)
|
||||
What is near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS) propagation?
|
||||
- A. Propagation near the MUF
|
||||
- B. Short distance MF or HF propagation at high elevation angles
|
||||
- C. Long path HF propagation at sunrise and sunset
|
||||
- D. Double hop propagation near the LUF
|
||||
- [[G3C11]] (D)
|
||||
Which ionospheric region is the most absorbent of signals below 10 MHz during daylight hours?
|
||||
- A. The F2 region
|
||||
- B. The F1 region
|
||||
- C. The E region
|
||||
- D. The D region
|
92
logseq/bak/pages/G4A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.965Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
92
logseq/bak/pages/G4A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.965Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
|
||||
G4A – Station configuration and operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4A01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the purpose of the notch filter found on many HF transceivers?
|
||||
- A. To restrict the transmitter voice bandwidth
|
||||
- B. To reduce interference from carriers in the receiver passband
|
||||
- C. To eliminate receiver interference from impulse noise sources
|
||||
- D. To remove interfering splatter generated by signals on adjacent frequencies
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A02]] (C)
|
||||
What is the benefit of using the opposite or “reverse” sideband when receiving CW?
|
||||
- A. Interference from impulse noise will be eliminated
|
||||
- B. More stations can be accommodated within a given signal passband
|
||||
- C. It may be possible to reduce or eliminate interference from other signals
|
||||
- D. Accidental out-of-band operation can be prevented
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A03]] (C)
|
||||
How does a noise blanker work?
|
||||
- A. By temporarily increasing received bandwidth
|
||||
- B. By redirecting noise pulses into a filter capacitor
|
||||
- C. By reducing receiver gain during a noise pulse
|
||||
- D. By clipping noise peaks
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A04]] (B)
|
||||
What is the effect on plate current of the correct setting of a vacuum-tube RF power amplifier’s TUNE control?
|
||||
- A. A pronounced peak
|
||||
- B. A pronounced dip
|
||||
- C. No change will be observed
|
||||
- D. A slow, rhythmic oscillation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A05]] (C)
|
||||
Why is automatic level control (ALC) used with an RF power amplifier?
|
||||
- A. To balance the transmitter audio frequency response
|
||||
- B. To reduce harmonic radiation
|
||||
- C. To prevent excessive drive
|
||||
- D. To increase overall efficiency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A06]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of an antenna tuner?
|
||||
- A. Reduce the SWR in the feed line to the antenna
|
||||
- B. Reduce the power dissipation in the feedline to the antenna
|
||||
- C. Increase power transfer from the transmitter to the feed line
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A07]] (A)
|
||||
What happens as a receiver’s noise reduction control level is increased?
|
||||
- A. Received signals may become distorted
|
||||
- B. Received frequency may become unstable
|
||||
- C. CW signals may become severely attenuated
|
||||
- D. Received frequency may shift several kHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A08]] (D)
|
||||
What is the correct adjustment for the LOAD or COUPLING control of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier?
|
||||
- A. Minimum SWR on the antenna
|
||||
- B. Minimum plate current without exceeding maximum allowable grid current
|
||||
- C. Highest plate voltage while minimizing grid current
|
||||
- D. Desired power output without exceeding maximum allowable plate current
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A09]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of delaying RF output after activating a transmitter’s keying line to an external amplifier?
|
||||
- A. To prevent key clicks on CW
|
||||
- B. To prevent transient overmodulation
|
||||
- C. To allow time for the amplifier to switch the antenna between the transceiver and the amplifier output
|
||||
- D. To allow time for the amplifier power supply to reach operating level
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A10]] (B)
|
||||
What is the function of an electronic keyer?
|
||||
- A. Automatic transmit/receive switching
|
||||
- B. Automatic generation of dots and dashes for CW operation
|
||||
- C. To allow time for switching the antenna from the receiver to the transmitter
|
||||
- D. Computer interface for PSK and RTTY operation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A11]] (B)
|
||||
Why should the ALC system be inactive when transmitting AFSK data signals?
|
||||
- A. ALC will invert the modulation of the AFSK mode
|
||||
- B. The ALC action distorts the signal
|
||||
- C. When using digital modes, too much ALC activity can cause the transmitter to overheat
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A12]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is a common use of the dual-VFO feature on a transceiver?
|
||||
- A. To allow transmitting on two frequencies at once
|
||||
- B. To permit full duplex operation -- that is, transmitting and receiving at the same time
|
||||
- C. To transmit on one frequency and listen on another
|
||||
- D. To improve frequency accuracy by allowing variable frequency output (VFO) operation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4A13]] (A)
|
||||
What is the purpose of using a receive attenuator?
|
||||
- A. To prevent receiver overload from strong incoming signals
|
||||
- B. To reduce the transmitter power when driving a linear amplifier
|
||||
- C. To reduce power consumption when operating from batteries
|
||||
- D. To reduce excessive audio level on strong signals
|
79
logseq/bak/pages/G4A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.567Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
79
logseq/bak/pages/G4A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.567Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
|
||||
G4A – Station configuration and operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4A01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the purpose of the notch filter found on many HF transceivers?
|
||||
- A. To restrict the transmitter voice bandwidth
|
||||
- B. To reduce interference from carriers in the receiver passband
|
||||
- C. To eliminate receiver interference from impulse noise sources
|
||||
- D. To remove interfering splatter generated by signals on adjacent frequencies
|
||||
- [[G4A02]] (C)
|
||||
What is the benefit of using the opposite or “reverse” sideband when receiving CW?
|
||||
- A. Interference from impulse noise will be eliminated
|
||||
- B. More stations can be accommodated within a given signal passband
|
||||
- C. It may be possible to reduce or eliminate interference from other signals
|
||||
- D. Accidental out-of-band operation can be prevented
|
||||
- [[G4A03]] (C)
|
||||
How does a noise blanker work?
|
||||
- A. By temporarily increasing received bandwidth
|
||||
- B. By redirecting noise pulses into a filter capacitor
|
||||
- C. By reducing receiver gain during a noise pulse
|
||||
- D. By clipping noise peaks
|
||||
- [[G4A04]] (B)
|
||||
What is the effect on plate current of the correct setting of a vacuum-tube RF power amplifier’s TUNE control?
|
||||
- A. A pronounced peak
|
||||
- B. A pronounced dip
|
||||
- C. No change will be observed
|
||||
- D. A slow, rhythmic oscillation
|
||||
- [[G4A05]] (C)
|
||||
Why is automatic level control (ALC) used with an RF power amplifier?
|
||||
- A. To balance the transmitter audio frequency response
|
||||
- B. To reduce harmonic radiation
|
||||
- C. To prevent excessive drive
|
||||
- D. To increase overall efficiency
|
||||
- [[G4A06]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of an antenna tuner?
|
||||
- A. Reduce the SWR in the feed line to the antenna
|
||||
- B. Reduce the power dissipation in the feedline to the antenna
|
||||
- C. Increase power transfer from the transmitter to the feed line
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4A07]] (A)
|
||||
What happens as a receiver’s noise reduction control level is increased?
|
||||
- A. Received signals may become distorted
|
||||
- B. Received frequency may become unstable
|
||||
- C. CW signals may become severely attenuated
|
||||
- D. Received frequency may shift several kHz
|
||||
- [[G4A08]] (D)
|
||||
What is the correct adjustment for the LOAD or COUPLING control of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier?
|
||||
- A. Minimum SWR on the antenna
|
||||
- B. Minimum plate current without exceeding maximum allowable grid current
|
||||
- C. Highest plate voltage while minimizing grid current
|
||||
- D. Desired power output without exceeding maximum allowable plate current
|
||||
- [[G4A09]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of delaying RF output after activating a transmitter’s keying line to an external amplifier?
|
||||
- A. To prevent key clicks on CW
|
||||
- B. To prevent transient overmodulation
|
||||
- C. To allow time for the amplifier to switch the antenna between the transceiver and the amplifier output
|
||||
- D. To allow time for the amplifier power supply to reach operating level
|
||||
- [[G4A10]] (B)
|
||||
What is the function of an electronic keyer?
|
||||
- A. Automatic transmit/receive switching
|
||||
- B. Automatic generation of dots and dashes for CW operation
|
||||
- C. To allow time for switching the antenna from the receiver to the transmitter
|
||||
- D. Computer interface for PSK and RTTY operation
|
||||
- [[G4A11]] (B)
|
||||
Why should the ALC system be inactive when transmitting AFSK data signals?
|
||||
- A. ALC will invert the modulation of the AFSK mode
|
||||
- B. The ALC action distorts the signal
|
||||
- C. When using digital modes, too much ALC activity can cause the transmitter to overheat
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4A12]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is a common use of the dual-VFO feature on a transceiver?
|
||||
- A. To allow transmitting on two frequencies at once
|
||||
- C. To transmit on one frequency and listen on another
|
||||
- D. To improve frequency accuracy by allowing variable frequency output (VFO) operation
|
||||
- [[G4A13]] (A)
|
||||
What is the purpose of using a receive attenuator?
|
||||
- A. To prevent receiver overload from strong incoming signals
|
||||
- B. To reduce the transmitter power when driving a linear amplifier
|
||||
- C. To reduce power consumption when operating from batteries
|
||||
- D. To reduce excessive audio level on strong signals
|
92
logseq/bak/pages/G4B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.964Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
92
logseq/bak/pages/G4B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.964Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
|
||||
G4B – Tests and test equipment
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4B01]] (D)
|
||||
What item of test equipment contains horizontal and vertical channel amplifiers?
|
||||
- A. An ohmmeter
|
||||
- B. A signal generator
|
||||
- C. An ammeter
|
||||
- D. An oscilloscope
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of an oscilloscope versus a digital voltmeter?
|
||||
- A. An oscilloscope uses less power
|
||||
- B. Complex impedances can be easily measured
|
||||
- C. Greater precision
|
||||
- D. Complex waveforms can be measured
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B03]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is the best instrument to use for checking the keying waveform of a CW transmitter?
|
||||
- A. An oscilloscope
|
||||
- B. A field strength meter
|
||||
- C. A sidetone monitor
|
||||
- D. A wavemeter
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B04]] (D)
|
||||
What signal source is connected to the vertical input of an oscilloscope when checking the RF envelope pattern of a transmitted signal?
|
||||
- A. The local oscillator of the transmitter
|
||||
- B. An external RF oscillator
|
||||
- C. The transmitter balanced mixer output
|
||||
- D. The attenuated RF output of the transmitter
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B05]] (D)
|
||||
Why do voltmeters have high input impedance?
|
||||
- A. It improves the frequency response
|
||||
- B. It allows for higher voltages to be safely measured
|
||||
- C. It improves the resolution of the readings
|
||||
- D. It decreases the loading on circuits being measured
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B06]] (C)
|
||||
What is an advantage of a digital multimeter as compared to an analog multimeter?
|
||||
- A. Better for measuring computer circuits
|
||||
- B. Less prone to overload
|
||||
- C. Higher precision
|
||||
- D. Faster response
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B07]] (B)
|
||||
What signals are used to conduct a two-tone test?
|
||||
- A. Two audio signals of the same frequency shifted 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. Two non-harmonically related audio signals
|
||||
- C. Two swept frequency tones
|
||||
- D. Two audio frequency range square wave signals of equal amplitude
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B08]] (A)
|
||||
What transmitter performance parameter does a two-tone test analyze?
|
||||
- A. Linearity
|
||||
- B. Percentage of suppression of the carrier and undesired sideband for SSB
|
||||
- C. Percentage of frequency modulation
|
||||
- D. Percentage of carrier phase shift
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B09]] (D)
|
||||
When is an analog multimeter preferred to a digital multimeter?
|
||||
- A. When testing logic circuits
|
||||
- B. When high precision is desired
|
||||
- C. When measuring the frequency of an oscillator
|
||||
- D. When adjusting circuits for maximum or minimum values
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B10]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following can be determined with a directional wattmeter?
|
||||
- A. Standing wave ratio
|
||||
- B. Antenna front-to-back ratio
|
||||
- C. RF interference
|
||||
- D. Radio wave propagation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B11]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following must be connected to an antenna analyzer when it is being used for SWR measurements?
|
||||
- A. Receiver
|
||||
- B. Transmitter
|
||||
- C. Antenna and feed line
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B12]] (B)
|
||||
What effect can strong signals from nearby transmitters have on an antenna analyzer?
|
||||
- A. Desensitization which can cause intermodulation products which interfere with impedance readings
|
||||
- B. Received power that interferes with SWR readings
|
||||
- C. Generation of harmonics which interfere with frequency readings
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4B13]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following can be measured with an antenna analyzer?
|
||||
- A. Front-to-back ratio of an antenna
|
||||
- B. Power output from a transmitter
|
||||
- C. Impedance of coaxial cable
|
||||
- D. Gain of a directional antenna
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G4C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.966Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G4C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.966Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G4C – Interference to consumer electronics; grounding and bonding
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4C01]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following might be useful in reducing RF interference to audio frequency circuits?
|
||||
- A. Bypass inductor
|
||||
- B. Bypass capacitor
|
||||
- C. Forward-biased diode
|
||||
- D. Reverse-biased diode
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C02]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following could be a cause of interference covering a wide range of frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Not using a balun or line isolator to feed balanced antennas
|
||||
- B. Lack of rectification of the transmitter’s signal in power conductors
|
||||
- C. Arcing at a poor electrical connection
|
||||
- D. Using a balun to feed an unbalanced antenna
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C03]] (C)
|
||||
What sound is heard from an audio device experiencing RF interference from a single sideband phone transmitter?
|
||||
- A. A steady hum whenever the transmitter is on the air
|
||||
- B. On-and-off humming or clicking
|
||||
- C. Distorted speech
|
||||
- D. Clearly audible speech
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C04]] (A)
|
||||
What sound is heard from an audio device experiencing RF interference from a CW transmitter?
|
||||
- A. On-and-off humming or clicking
|
||||
- B. A CW signal at a nearly pure audio frequency
|
||||
- C. A chirpy CW signal
|
||||
- D. Severely distorted audio
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C05]] (D)
|
||||
What is a possible cause of high voltages that produce RF burns?
|
||||
- A. Flat braid rather than round wire has been used for the ground wire
|
||||
- B. Insulated wire has been used for the ground wire
|
||||
- C. The ground rod is resonant
|
||||
- D. The ground wire has high impedance on that frequency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C06]] (C)
|
||||
What is a possible effect of a resonant ground connection?
|
||||
- A. Overheating of ground straps
|
||||
- B. Corrosion of the ground rod
|
||||
- C. High RF voltages on the enclosures of station equipment
|
||||
- D. A ground loop
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C07]] (A)
|
||||
Why should soldered joints not be used in lightning protection ground connections?
|
||||
- A. A soldered joint will likely be destroyed by the heat of a lightning strike
|
||||
- B. Solder flux will prevent a low conductivity connection
|
||||
- C. Solder has too high a dielectric constant to provide adequate lightning protection
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C08]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following would reduce RF interference caused by common-mode current on an audio cable?
|
||||
- A. Place a ferrite choke on the cable
|
||||
- B. Connect the center conductor to the shield of all cables to short circuit the RFI signal
|
||||
- C. Ground the center conductor of the audio cable causing the interference
|
||||
- D. Add an additional insulating jacket to the cable
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C09]] (D)
|
||||
How can the effects of ground loops be minimized?
|
||||
- A. Connect all ground conductors in series
|
||||
- B. Connect the AC neutral conductor to the ground wire
|
||||
- C. Avoid using lock washers and star washers when making ground connections
|
||||
- D. Bond equipment enclosures together
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C10]] (A)
|
||||
What could be a symptom caused by a ground loop in your station’s audio connections?
|
||||
- A. You receive reports of “hum” on your station’s transmitted signal
|
||||
- B. The SWR reading for one or more antennas is suddenly very high
|
||||
- C. An item of station equipment starts to draw excessive amounts of current
|
||||
- D. You receive reports of harmonic interference from your station
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C11]] (C)
|
||||
What technique helps to minimize RF “hot spots” in an amateur station?
|
||||
- A. Building all equipment in a metal enclosure
|
||||
- B. Using surge suppressor power outlets
|
||||
- C. Bonding all equipment enclosures together
|
||||
- D. Placing low-pass filters on all feed lines
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4C12]] (D)
|
||||
Why must all metal enclosures of station equipment be grounded?
|
||||
- A. It prevents a blown fuse in the event of an internal short circuit
|
||||
- B. It prevents signal overload
|
||||
- C. It ensures that the neutral wire is grounded
|
||||
- D. It ensures that hazardous voltages cannot appear on the chassis
|
74
logseq/bak/pages/G4C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.568Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
74
logseq/bak/pages/G4C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.568Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G4C – Interference to consumer electronics; grounding and bonding
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4C01]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following might be useful in reducing RF interference to audio frequency circuits?
|
||||
- A. Bypass inductor
|
||||
- B. Bypass capacitor
|
||||
- C. Forward-biased diode
|
||||
- D. Reverse-biased diode
|
||||
- [[G4C02]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following could be a cause of interference covering a wide range of frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Not using a balun or line isolator to feed balanced antennas
|
||||
- B. Lack of rectification of the transmitter’s signal in power conductors
|
||||
- C. Arcing at a poor electrical connection
|
||||
- D. Using a balun to feed an unbalanced antenna
|
||||
- [[G4C03]] (C)
|
||||
What sound is heard from an audio device experiencing RF interference from a single sideband phone transmitter?
|
||||
- A. A steady hum whenever the transmitter is on the air
|
||||
- B. On-and-off humming or clicking
|
||||
- C. Distorted speech
|
||||
- D. Clearly audible speech
|
||||
- [[G4C04]] (A)
|
||||
What sound is heard from an audio device experiencing RF interference from a CW transmitter?
|
||||
- A. On-and-off humming or clicking
|
||||
- B. A CW signal at a nearly pure audio frequency
|
||||
- C. A chirpy CW signal
|
||||
- D. Severely distorted audio
|
||||
- [[G4C05]] (D)
|
||||
What is a possible cause of high voltages that produce RF burns?
|
||||
- A. Flat braid rather than round wire has been used for the ground wire
|
||||
- B. Insulated wire has been used for the ground wire
|
||||
- C. The ground rod is resonant
|
||||
- D. The ground wire has high impedance on that frequency
|
||||
- [[G4C06]] (C)
|
||||
What is a possible effect of a resonant ground connection?
|
||||
- A. Overheating of ground straps
|
||||
- B. Corrosion of the ground rod
|
||||
- C. High RF voltages on the enclosures of station equipment
|
||||
- D. A ground loop
|
||||
- [[G4C07]] (A)
|
||||
Why should soldered joints not be used in lightning protection ground connections?
|
||||
- A. A soldered joint will likely be destroyed by the heat of a lightning strike
|
||||
- B. Solder flux will prevent a low conductivity connection
|
||||
- C. Solder has too high a dielectric constant to provide adequate lightning protection
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4C08]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following would reduce RF interference caused by common-mode current on an audio cable?
|
||||
- A. Place a ferrite choke on the cable
|
||||
- B. Connect the center conductor to the shield of all cables to short circuit the RFI signal
|
||||
- C. Ground the center conductor of the audio cable causing the interference
|
||||
- D. Add an additional insulating jacket to the cable
|
||||
- [[G4C09]] (D)
|
||||
How can the effects of ground loops be minimized?
|
||||
- A. Connect all ground conductors in series
|
||||
- B. Connect the AC neutral conductor to the ground wire
|
||||
- C. Avoid using lock washers and star washers when making ground connections
|
||||
- D. Bond equipment enclosures together
|
||||
- [[G4C10]] (A)
|
||||
What could be a symptom caused by a ground loop in your station’s audio connections?
|
||||
- A. You receive reports of “hum” on your station’s transmitted signal
|
||||
- B. The SWR reading for one or more antennas is suddenly very high
|
||||
- C. An item of station equipment starts to draw excessive amounts of current
|
||||
- D. You receive reports of harmonic interference from your station
|
||||
- [[G4C11]] (C)
|
||||
What technique helps to minimize RF “hot spots” in an amateur station?
|
||||
- A. Building all equipment in a metal enclosure
|
||||
- B. Using surge suppressor power outlets
|
||||
- C. Bonding all equipment enclosures together
|
||||
- D. Placing low-pass filters on all feed lines
|
||||
- [[G4C12]] (D)
|
||||
Why must all metal enclosures of station equipment be grounded?
|
||||
- A. It prevents a blown fuse in the event of an internal short circuit
|
||||
- B. It prevents signal overload
|
||||
- C. It ensures that the neutral wire is grounded
|
||||
- D. It ensures that hazardous voltages cannot appear on the chassis
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G4D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.968Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G4D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.968Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G4D – Speech processors; S meters; sideband operation near band edges
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4D01]] (A)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a speech processor in a transceiver?
|
||||
- A. Increase the apparent loudness of transmitted voice signals
|
||||
- B. Increase transmitter bass response for more natural-sounding SSB signals
|
||||
- C. Prevent distortion of voice signals
|
||||
- D. Decrease high-frequency voice output to prevent out-of-band operation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D02]] (B)
|
||||
How does a speech processor affect a single sideband phone signal?
|
||||
- A. It increases peak power
|
||||
- B. It increases average power
|
||||
- C. It reduces harmonic distortion
|
||||
- D. It reduces intermodulation distortion
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D03]] (D)
|
||||
What is the effect of an incorrectly adjusted speech processor?
|
||||
- A. Distorted speech
|
||||
- B. Excess intermodulation products
|
||||
- C. Excessive background noise
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D04]] (C)
|
||||
What does an S meter measure?
|
||||
- A. Carrier suppression
|
||||
- B. Impedance
|
||||
- C. Received signal strength
|
||||
- D. Transmitter power output
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D05]] (D)
|
||||
How does a signal that reads 20 dB over S9 compare to one that reads S9 on a receiver, assuming a properly calibrated S meter?
|
||||
- A. It is 10 times less powerful
|
||||
- B. It is 20 times less powerful
|
||||
- C. It is 20 times more powerful
|
||||
- D. It is 100 times more powerful
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D06]] (A)
|
||||
How much change in signal strength is typically represented by one S unit?
|
||||
- A. 6 dB
|
||||
- B. 12 dB
|
||||
- C. 15 dB
|
||||
- D. 18 dB
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D07]] (C)
|
||||
How much must the power output of a transmitter be raised to change the S meter reading on a distant receiver from S8 to S9?
|
||||
- A. Approximately 1.5 times
|
||||
- B. Approximately 2 times
|
||||
- C. Approximately 4 times
|
||||
- D. Approximately 8 times
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D08]] (C)
|
||||
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz LSB signal when the displayed carrier frequency is set to 7.178 MHz?
|
||||
- A. 7.178 MHz to 7.181 MHz
|
||||
- B. 7.178 MHz to 7.184 MHz
|
||||
- C. 7.175 MHz to 7.178 MHz
|
||||
- D. 7.1765 MHz to 7.1795 MHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D09]] (B)
|
||||
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz USB signal with the displayed carrier frequency set to 14.347 MHz?
|
||||
- A. 14.347 MHz to 14.647 MHz
|
||||
- B. 14.347 MHz to 14.350 MHz
|
||||
- C. 14.344 MHz to 14.347 MHz
|
||||
- D. 14.3455 MHz to 14.3485 MHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D10]] (A)
|
||||
How close to the lower edge of a band’s phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide LSB?
|
||||
- A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the segment
|
||||
- B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the segment
|
||||
- C. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
|
||||
- D. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4D11]] (B)
|
||||
How close to the upper edge of a band’s phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide USB?
|
||||
- A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the band
|
||||
- B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the band
|
||||
- C. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
|
||||
- D. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G4E/2025-05-01T18_48_55.967Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G4E/2025-05-01T18_48_55.967Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G4E – Mobile and portable HF stations; alternative energy source operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4E01]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a capacitance hat on a mobile antenna?
|
||||
- A. To increase the power handling capacity of a whip antenna
|
||||
- B. To reduce radiation resistance
|
||||
- C. To electrically lengthen a physically short antenna
|
||||
- D. To lower the radiation angle
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E02]] (D)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a corona ball on an HF mobile antenna?
|
||||
- A. To narrow the operating bandwidth of the antenna
|
||||
- B. To increase the “Q” of the antenna
|
||||
- C. To reduce the chance of damage if the antenna should strike an object
|
||||
- D. To reduce RF voltage discharge from the tip of the antenna while transmitting
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E03]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following direct, fused power connections would be the best for a 100-watt HF mobile installation?
|
||||
- A. To the battery using heavy-gauge wire
|
||||
- B. To the alternator or generator using heavy-gauge wire
|
||||
- C. To the battery using insulated heavy duty balanced transmission line
|
||||
- D. To the alternator or generator using insulated heavy duty balanced transmission line
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E04]] (B)
|
||||
Why should DC power for a 100-watt HF transceiver not be supplied by a vehicle’s auxiliary power socket?
|
||||
- A. The socket is not wired with an RF-shielded power cable
|
||||
- B. The socket’s wiring may be inadequate for the current drawn by the transceiver
|
||||
- C. The DC polarity of the socket is reversed from the polarity of modern HF transceivers
|
||||
- D. Drawing more than 50 watts from this socket could cause the engine to overheat
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E05]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following most limits an HF mobile installation?
|
||||
- A. “Picket fencing”
|
||||
- B. The wire gauge of the DC power line to the transceiver
|
||||
- C. Efficiency of the electrically short antenna
|
||||
- D. FCC rules limiting mobile output power on the 75-meter band
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E06]] (C)
|
||||
What is one disadvantage of using a shortened mobile antenna as opposed to a full-size antenna?
|
||||
- A. Short antennas are more likely to cause distortion of transmitted signals
|
||||
- B. Q of the antenna will be very low
|
||||
- C. Operating bandwidth may be very limited
|
||||
- D. Harmonic radiation may increase
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following may cause receive interference to an HF transceiver installed in a vehicle?
|
||||
- A. The battery charging system
|
||||
- B. The fuel delivery system
|
||||
- C. The control computers
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E08]] (A)
|
||||
In what configuration are the individual cells in a solar panel connected together?
|
||||
- A. Series-parallel
|
||||
- B. Shunt
|
||||
- C. Bypass
|
||||
- D. Full-wave bridge
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E09]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate open-circuit voltage from a fully illuminated silicon photovoltaic cell?
|
||||
- A. 0.02 VDC
|
||||
- B. 0.5 VDC
|
||||
- C. 0.2 VDC
|
||||
- D. 1.38 VDC
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E10]] (B)
|
||||
Why should a series diode be connected between a solar panel and a storage battery that is being charged by the panel?
|
||||
- A. To prevent overload by regulating the charging voltage
|
||||
- B. To prevent discharge of the battery through the panel during times of low or no illumination
|
||||
- C. To limit the current flowing from the panel to a safe value
|
||||
- D. To prevent damage to the battery due to excessive voltage at high illumination levels
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G4E11]] (D)
|
||||
What precaution should be taken when connecting a solar panel to a lithium iron phosphate battery?
|
||||
- A. Ground the solar panel outer metal framework
|
||||
- B. Ensure the battery is placed terminals-up
|
||||
- C. A series resistor must be in place
|
||||
- D. The solar panel must have a charge controller
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G5A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.969Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G5A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.969Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G5A – Reactance; inductance; capacitance; impedance; impedance transformation; resonance
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G5A01]] (C)
|
||||
What happens when inductive and capacitive reactance are equal in a series LC circuit?
|
||||
- A. Resonance causes impedance to be very high
|
||||
- B. Impedance is equal to the geometric mean of the inductance and capacitance
|
||||
- C. Resonance causes impedance to be very low
|
||||
- D. Impedance is equal to the arithmetic mean of the inductance and capacitance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is reactance?
|
||||
- A. Opposition to the flow of direct current caused by resistance
|
||||
- B. Opposition to the flow of alternating current caused by capacitance or inductance
|
||||
- C. Reinforcement of the flow of direct current caused by resistance
|
||||
- D. Reinforcement of the flow of alternating current caused by capacitance or inductance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A03]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is opposition to the flow of alternating current in an inductor?
|
||||
- A. Conductance
|
||||
- B. Reluctance
|
||||
- C. Admittance
|
||||
- D. Reactance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A04]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is opposition to the flow of alternating current in a capacitor?
|
||||
- A. Conductance
|
||||
- B. Reluctance
|
||||
- C. Reactance
|
||||
- D. Admittance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A05]] (D)
|
||||
How does an inductor react to AC?
|
||||
- A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
- B. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
- C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
- D. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A06]] (A)
|
||||
How does a capacitor react to AC?
|
||||
- A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
- B. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
- C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
- D. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A07]] (D)
|
||||
What is the term for the inverse of impedance?
|
||||
- A. Conductance
|
||||
- B. Susceptance
|
||||
- C. Reluctance
|
||||
- D. Admittance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A08]] (C)
|
||||
What is impedance?
|
||||
- A. The ratio of current to voltage
|
||||
- B. The product of current and voltage
|
||||
- C. The ratio of voltage to current
|
||||
- D. The product of current and reactance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A09]] (B)
|
||||
What unit is used to measure reactance?
|
||||
- A. Farad
|
||||
- B. Ohm
|
||||
- C. Ampere
|
||||
- D. Siemens
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A10]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following devices can be used for impedance matching at radio frequencies?
|
||||
- A. A transformer
|
||||
- B. A Pi-network
|
||||
- C. A length of transmission line
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A11]] (B)
|
||||
What letter is used to represent reactance?
|
||||
- A. Z
|
||||
- B. X
|
||||
- C. B
|
||||
- D. Y
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5A12]] (D)
|
||||
What occurs in an LC circuit at resonance?
|
||||
- A. Current and voltage are equal
|
||||
- B. Resistance is cancelled
|
||||
- C. The circuit radiates all its energy in the form of radio waves
|
||||
- D. Inductive reactance and capacitive reactance cancel
|
99
logseq/bak/pages/G5B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.968Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
99
logseq/bak/pages/G5B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.968Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
|
||||
G5B – The decibel; current and voltage dividers; electrical power calculations; sine wave root-mean-square (RMS) values; PEP calculations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G5B01]] (B)
|
||||
What dB change represents a factor of two increase or decrease in power?
|
||||
- A. Approximately 2 dB
|
||||
- B. Approximately 3 dB
|
||||
- C. Approximately 6 dB
|
||||
- D. Approximately 9 dB
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B02]] (C)
|
||||
How does the total current relate to the individual currents in a circuit of parallel resistors?
|
||||
- A. It equals the average of the branch currents
|
||||
- B. It decreases as more parallel branches are added to the circuit
|
||||
- C. It equals the sum of the currents through each branch
|
||||
- D. It is the sum of the reciprocal of each individual voltage drop
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B03]] (B)
|
||||
How many watts of electrical power are consumed if 400 VDC is supplied to an 800-ohm load?
|
||||
- A. 0.5 watts
|
||||
- B. 200 watts
|
||||
- C. 400 watts
|
||||
- D. 3200 watts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B04]] (A)
|
||||
How many watts of electrical power are consumed by a 12 VDC light bulb that draws 0.2 amperes?
|
||||
- A. 2.4 watts
|
||||
- B. 24 watts
|
||||
- C. 6 watts
|
||||
- D. 60 watts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B05]] (A)
|
||||
How many watts are consumed when a current of 7.0 milliamperes flows through a 1,250-ohm resistance?
|
||||
- A. Approximately 61 milliwatts
|
||||
- B. Approximately 61 watts
|
||||
- C. Approximately 11 milliwatts
|
||||
- D. Approximately 11 watts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B06]] (B)
|
||||
What is the PEP produced by 200 volts peak-to-peak across a 50-ohm dummy load?
|
||||
- A. 1.4 watts
|
||||
- B. 100 watts
|
||||
- C. 353.5 watts
|
||||
- D. 400 watts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B07]] (C)
|
||||
What value of an AC signal produces the same power dissipation in a resistor as a DC voltage of the same value?
|
||||
- A. The peak-to-peak value
|
||||
- B. The peak value
|
||||
- C. The RMS value
|
||||
- D. The reciprocal of the RMS value
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B08]] (D)
|
||||
What is the peak-to-peak voltage of a sine wave with an RMS voltage of 120 volts?
|
||||
- A. 84.8 volts
|
||||
- B. 169.7 volts
|
||||
- C. 240.0 volts
|
||||
- D. 339.4 volts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B09]] (B)
|
||||
What is the RMS voltage of a sine wave with a value of 17 volts peak?
|
||||
- A. 8.5 volts
|
||||
- B. 12 volts
|
||||
- C. 24 volts
|
||||
- D. 34 volts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B10]] (C)
|
||||
What percentage of power loss is equivalent to a loss of 1 dB?
|
||||
- A. 10.9 percent
|
||||
- B. 12.2 percent
|
||||
- C. 20.6 percent
|
||||
- D. 25.9 percent
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B11]] (B)
|
||||
What is the ratio of PEP to average power for an unmodulated carrier?
|
||||
- A. 0.707
|
||||
- B. 1.00
|
||||
- C. 1.414
|
||||
- D. 2.00
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B12]] (B)
|
||||
What is the RMS voltage across a 50-ohm dummy load dissipating 1200 watts?
|
||||
- A. 173 volts
|
||||
- B. 245 volts
|
||||
- C. 346 volts
|
||||
- D. 692 volts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B13]] (B)
|
||||
What is the output PEP of an unmodulated carrier if the average power is 1060 watts?
|
||||
- A. 530 watts
|
||||
- B. 1060 watts
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts
|
||||
- D. 2120 watts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5B14]] (B)
|
||||
What is the output PEP of 500 volts peak-to-peak across a 50-ohm load?
|
||||
- A. 8.75 watts
|
||||
- B. 625 watts
|
||||
- C. 2500 watts
|
||||
- D. 5000 watts
|
99
logseq/bak/pages/G5C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.970Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
99
logseq/bak/pages/G5C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.970Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
|
||||
G5C – Resistors, capacitors, and inductors in series and parallel; transformers
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G5C01]] (C)
|
||||
What causes a voltage to appear across the secondary winding of a transformer when an AC voltage source is connected across its primary winding?
|
||||
- A. Capacitive coupling
|
||||
- B. Displacement current coupling
|
||||
- C. Mutual inductance
|
||||
- D. Mutual capacitance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C02]] (A)
|
||||
What is the output voltage if an input signal is applied to the secondary winding of a 4:1 voltage step-down transformer instead of the primary winding?
|
||||
- A. The input voltage is multiplied by 4
|
||||
- B. The input voltage is divided by 4
|
||||
- C. Additional resistance must be added in series with the primary to prevent overload
|
||||
- D. Additional resistance must be added in parallel with the secondary to prevent overload
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C03]] (A)
|
||||
What is the total resistance of a 10-, a 20-, and a 50-ohm resistor connected in parallel?
|
||||
- A. 5.9 ohms
|
||||
- B. 0.17 ohms
|
||||
- C. 17 ohms
|
||||
- D. 80 ohms
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C04]] (D)
|
||||
What is the approximate total resistance of a 100- and a 200-ohm resistor in parallel?
|
||||
- A. 300 ohms
|
||||
- B. 150 ohms
|
||||
- C. 75 ohms
|
||||
- D. 67 ohms
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C05]] (B)
|
||||
Why is the primary winding wire of a voltage step-up transformer usually a larger size than that of the secondary winding?
|
||||
- A. To improve the coupling between the primary and secondary
|
||||
- B. To accommodate the higher current of the primary
|
||||
- C. To prevent parasitic oscillations due to resistive losses in the primary
|
||||
- D. To ensure that the volume of the primary winding is equal to the volume of the secondary winding
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C06]] (A)
|
||||
What is the voltage output of a transformer with a 500-turn primary and a 1500-turn secondary when 120 VAC is applied to the primary?
|
||||
- A. 360 volts
|
||||
- B. 120 volts
|
||||
- C. 40 volts
|
||||
- D. 25.5 volts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C07]] (A)
|
||||
What transformer turns ratio matches an antenna’s 600-ohm feed point impedance to a 50-ohm coaxial cable?
|
||||
- A. 3.5 to 1
|
||||
- B. 12 to 1
|
||||
- C. 24 to 1
|
||||
- D. 144 to 1
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C08]] (D)
|
||||
What is the equivalent capacitance of two 5.0-nanofarad capacitors and one 750-picofarad capacitor connected in parallel?
|
||||
- A. 576.9 nanofarads
|
||||
- B. 1,733 picofarads
|
||||
- C. 3,583 picofarads
|
||||
- D. 10.750 nanofarads
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C09]] (C)
|
||||
What is the capacitance of three 100-microfarad capacitors connected in series?
|
||||
- A. 0.33 microfarads
|
||||
- B. 3.0 microfarads
|
||||
- C. 33.3 microfarads
|
||||
- D. 300 microfarads
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C10]] (C)
|
||||
What is the inductance of three 10-millihenry inductors connected in parallel?
|
||||
- A. 0.30 henries
|
||||
- B. 3.3 henries
|
||||
- C. 3.3 millihenries
|
||||
- D. 30 millihenries
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C11]] (C)
|
||||
What is the inductance of a circuit with a 20-millihenry inductor connected in series with a 50-millihenry inductor?
|
||||
- A. 7 millihenries
|
||||
- B. 14.3 millihenries
|
||||
- C. 70 millihenries
|
||||
- D. 1,000 millihenries
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C12]] (B)
|
||||
What is the capacitance of a 20-microfarad capacitor connected in series with a 50-microfarad capacitor?
|
||||
- A. 0.07 microfarads
|
||||
- B. 14.3 microfarads
|
||||
- C. 70 microfarads
|
||||
- D. 1,000 microfarads
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C13]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following components should be added to a capacitor to increase the capacitance?
|
||||
- A. An inductor in series
|
||||
- B. An inductor in parallel
|
||||
- C. A capacitor in parallel
|
||||
- D. A capacitor in series
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G5C14]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following components should be added to an inductor to increase the inductance?
|
||||
- A. A capacitor in series
|
||||
- B. A capacitor in parallel
|
||||
- C. An inductor in parallel
|
||||
- D. An inductor in series
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G6A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.969Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G6A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.969Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G6A – Resistors; capacitors; inductors; rectifiers; solid-state diodes and transistors; vacuum tubes; batteries
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G6A01]] (C)
|
||||
What is the minimum allowable discharge voltage for maximum life of a standard 12-volt lead-acid battery?
|
||||
- A. 6 volts
|
||||
- B. 8.5 volts
|
||||
- C. 10.5 volts
|
||||
- D. 12 volts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is an advantage of batteries with low internal resistance?
|
||||
- A. Long life
|
||||
- B. High discharge current
|
||||
- C. High voltage
|
||||
- D. Rapid recharge
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A03]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate forward threshold voltage of a germanium diode?
|
||||
- A. 0.1 volt
|
||||
- B. 0.3 volts
|
||||
- C. 0.7 volts
|
||||
- D. 1.0 volts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A04]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of an electrolytic capacitor?
|
||||
- A. Tight tolerance
|
||||
- B. Much less leakage than any other type
|
||||
- C. High capacitance for a given volume
|
||||
- D. Inexpensive RF capacitor
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A05]] (C)
|
||||
What is the approximate forward threshold voltage of a silicon junction diode?
|
||||
- A. 0.1 volt
|
||||
- B. 0.3 volts
|
||||
- C. 0.7 volts
|
||||
- D. 1.0 volts
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A06]] (B)
|
||||
Why should wire-wound resistors not be used in RF circuits?
|
||||
- A. The resistor’s tolerance value would not be adequate
|
||||
- B. The resistor’s inductance could make circuit performance unpredictable
|
||||
- C. The resistor could overheat
|
||||
- D. The resistor’s internal capacitance would detune the circuit
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A07]] (A)
|
||||
What are the operating points for a bipolar transistor used as a switch?
|
||||
- A. Saturation and cutoff
|
||||
- B. The active region (between cutoff and saturation)
|
||||
- C. Peak and valley current points
|
||||
- D. Enhancement and depletion modes
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A08]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of low voltage ceramic capacitors?
|
||||
- A. Tight tolerance
|
||||
- B. High stability
|
||||
- C. High capacitance for given volume
|
||||
- D. Comparatively low cost
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A09]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes MOSFET construction?
|
||||
- A. The gate is formed by a back-biased junction
|
||||
- B. The gate is separated from the channel by a thin insulating layer
|
||||
- C. The source is separated from the drain by a thin insulating layer
|
||||
- D. The source is formed by depositing metal on silicon
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A10]] (A)
|
||||
Which element of a vacuum tube regulates the flow of electrons between cathode and plate?
|
||||
- A. Control grid
|
||||
- B. Suppressor grid
|
||||
- C. Screen grid
|
||||
- D. Trigger electrode
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A11]] (C)
|
||||
What happens when an inductor is operated above its self-resonant frequency?
|
||||
- A. Its reactance increases
|
||||
- B. Harmonics are generated
|
||||
- C. It becomes capacitive
|
||||
- D. Catastrophic failure is likely
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6A12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary purpose of a screen grid in a vacuum tube?
|
||||
- A. To reduce grid-to-plate capacitance
|
||||
- B. To increase efficiency
|
||||
- C. To increase the control grid resistance
|
||||
- D. To decrease plate resistance
|
74
logseq/bak/pages/G6A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.571Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
74
logseq/bak/pages/G6A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.571Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G6A – Resistors; capacitors; inductors; rectifiers; solid-state diodes and transistors; vacuum tubes; batteries
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G6A01]] (C)
|
||||
What is the minimum allowable discharge voltage for maximum life of a standard 12-volt lead-acid battery?
|
||||
- A. 6 volts
|
||||
- B. 8.5 volts
|
||||
- C. 10.5 volts
|
||||
- D. 12 volts
|
||||
- [[G6A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is an advantage of batteries with low internal resistance?
|
||||
- A. Long life
|
||||
- B. High discharge current
|
||||
- C. High voltage
|
||||
- D. Rapid recharge
|
||||
- [[G6A03]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate forward threshold voltage of a germanium diode?
|
||||
- A. 0.1 volt
|
||||
- B. 0.3 volts
|
||||
- C. 0.7 volts
|
||||
- D. 1.0 volts
|
||||
- [[G6A04]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of an electrolytic capacitor?
|
||||
- A. Tight tolerance
|
||||
- B. Much less leakage than any other type
|
||||
- C. High capacitance for a given volume
|
||||
- D. Inexpensive RF capacitor
|
||||
- [[G6A05]] (C)
|
||||
What is the approximate forward threshold voltage of a silicon junction diode?
|
||||
- A. 0.1 volt
|
||||
- B. 0.3 volts
|
||||
- C. 0.7 volts
|
||||
- D. 1.0 volts
|
||||
- [[G6A06]] (B)
|
||||
Why should wire-wound resistors not be used in RF circuits?
|
||||
- A. The resistor’s tolerance value would not be adequate
|
||||
- B. The resistor’s inductance could make circuit performance unpredictable
|
||||
- C. The resistor could overheat
|
||||
- D. The resistor’s internal capacitance would detune the circuit
|
||||
- [[G6A07]] (A)
|
||||
What are the operating points for a bipolar transistor used as a switch?
|
||||
- A. Saturation and cutoff
|
||||
- B. The active region (between cutoff and saturation)
|
||||
- C. Peak and valley current points
|
||||
- D. Enhancement and depletion modes
|
||||
- [[G6A08]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of low voltage ceramic capacitors?
|
||||
- A. Tight tolerance
|
||||
- B. High stability
|
||||
- C. High capacitance for given volume
|
||||
- D. Comparatively low cost
|
||||
- [[G6A09]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes MOSFET construction?
|
||||
- A. The gate is formed by a back-biased junction
|
||||
- B. The gate is separated from the channel by a thin insulating layer
|
||||
- C. The source is separated from the drain by a thin insulating layer
|
||||
- D. The source is formed by depositing metal on silicon
|
||||
- [[G6A10]] (A)
|
||||
Which element of a vacuum tube regulates the flow of electrons between cathode and plate?
|
||||
- A. Control grid
|
||||
- B. Suppressor grid
|
||||
- C. Screen grid
|
||||
- D. Trigger electrode
|
||||
- [[G6A11]] (C)
|
||||
What happens when an inductor is operated above its self-resonant frequency?
|
||||
- A. Its reactance increases
|
||||
- B. Harmonics are generated
|
||||
- C. It becomes capacitive
|
||||
- D. Catastrophic failure is likely
|
||||
- [[G6A12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary purpose of a screen grid in a vacuum tube?
|
||||
- A. To reduce grid-to-plate capacitance
|
||||
- B. To increase efficiency
|
||||
- C. To increase the control grid resistance
|
||||
- D. To decrease plate resistance
|
81
logseq/bak/pages/G6B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.970Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
81
logseq/bak/pages/G6B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.970Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
|
||||
G6B – Analog and digital integrated circuits (ICs); microwave ICs (MMICs); display devices; RF connectors; ferrite cores
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G6B01]] (C)
|
||||
What determines the performance of a ferrite core at different frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Its conductivity
|
||||
- B. Its thickness
|
||||
- C. The composition, or “mix,” of materials used
|
||||
- D. The ratio of outer diameter to inner diameter
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B02]] (B)
|
||||
What is meant by the term MMIC?
|
||||
- A. Multi-Mode Integrated Circuit
|
||||
- B. Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
|
||||
- C. Metal Monolayer Integrated Circuit
|
||||
- D. Mode Modulated Integrated Circuit
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B03]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of CMOS integrated circuits compared to TTL integrated circuits?
|
||||
- A. Low power consumption
|
||||
- B. High power handling capability
|
||||
- C. Better suited for RF amplification
|
||||
- D. Better suited for power supply regulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B04]] (C)
|
||||
What is a typical upper frequency limit for low SWR operation of 50-ohm BNC connectors?
|
||||
- A. 50 MHz
|
||||
- B. 500 MHz
|
||||
- C. 4 GHz
|
||||
- D. 40 GHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B05]] (D)
|
||||
What is an advantage of using a ferrite core toroidal inductor?
|
||||
- A. Large values of inductance may be obtained
|
||||
- B. The magnetic properties of the core may be optimized for a specific range of frequencies
|
||||
- C. Most of the magnetic field is contained in the core
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B06]] (D)
|
||||
What kind of device is an integrated circuit operational amplifier?
|
||||
- A. Digital
|
||||
- B. MMIC
|
||||
- C. Programmable Logic
|
||||
- D. Analog
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a type N connector?
|
||||
- A. A moisture-resistant RF connector useful to 10 GHz
|
||||
- B. A small bayonet connector used for data circuits
|
||||
- C. A low noise figure VHF connector
|
||||
- D. A nickel plated version of the PL-259
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B08]] (D)
|
||||
How is an LED biased when emitting light?
|
||||
- A. In the tunnel-effect region
|
||||
- B. At the Zener voltage
|
||||
- C. Reverse biased
|
||||
- D. Forward biased
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B09]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G6B10]] (A)
|
||||
How does a ferrite bead or core reduce common-mode RF current on the shield of a coaxial cable?
|
||||
- A. By creating an impedance in the current’s path
|
||||
- B. It converts common-mode current to differential mode current
|
||||
- C. By creating an out-of-phase current to cancel the common-mode current
|
||||
- D. Ferrites expel magnetic fields
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B11]] (B)
|
||||
What is an SMA connector?
|
||||
- A. A type-S to type-M adaptor
|
||||
- B. A small threaded connector suitable for signals up to several GHz
|
||||
- C. A connector designed for serial multiple access signals
|
||||
- D. A type of push-on connector intended for high-voltage applications
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G6B12]] (C)
|
||||
Which of these connector types is commonly used for low frequency or dc signal connections to a transceiver?
|
||||
- A. PL-259
|
||||
- B. BNC
|
||||
- C. RCA Phono
|
||||
- D. Type N
|
92
logseq/bak/pages/G7A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.971Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
92
logseq/bak/pages/G7A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.971Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
|
||||
G7A – Power supplies; schematic symbols
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7A01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the function of a power supply bleeder resistor?
|
||||
- A. It acts as a fuse for excess voltage
|
||||
- B. It discharges the filter capacitors when power is removed
|
||||
- C. It removes shock hazards from the induction coils
|
||||
- D. It eliminates ground loop current
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A02]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following components are used in a power supply filter network?
|
||||
- A. Diodes
|
||||
- B. Transformers and transducers
|
||||
- C. Capacitors and inductors
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A03]] (A)
|
||||
Which type of rectifier circuit uses two diodes and a center-tapped transformer?
|
||||
- A. Full-wave
|
||||
- B. Full-wave bridge
|
||||
- C. Half-wave
|
||||
- D. Synchronous
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A04]] (A)
|
||||
What is characteristic of a half-wave rectifier in a power supply?
|
||||
- A. Only one diode is required
|
||||
- B. The ripple frequency is twice that of a full-wave rectifier
|
||||
- C. More current can be drawn from the half-wave rectifier
|
||||
- D. The output voltage is two times the peak input voltage
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A05]] (B)
|
||||
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a half-wave rectifier?
|
||||
- A. 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. 180 degrees
|
||||
- C. 270 degrees
|
||||
- D. 360 degrees
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A06]] (D)
|
||||
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a full-wave rectifier?
|
||||
- A. 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. 180 degrees
|
||||
- C. 270 degrees
|
||||
- D. 360 degrees
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A07]] (A)
|
||||
What is the output waveform of an unfiltered full-wave rectifier connected to a resistive load?
|
||||
- A. A series of DC pulses at twice the frequency of the AC input
|
||||
- B. A series of DC pulses at the same frequency as the AC input
|
||||
- C. A sine wave at half the frequency of the AC input
|
||||
- D. A steady DC voltage
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A08]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of a switchmode power supply as compared to a linear power supply?
|
||||
- A. Faster switching time makes higher output voltage possible
|
||||
- B. Fewer circuit components are required
|
||||
- C. High-frequency operation allows the use of smaller components
|
||||
- D. Inherently more stable
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A09]] (C)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a field effect transistor?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 2
|
||||
- B. Symbol 5
|
||||
- C. Symbol 1
|
||||
- D. Symbol 4
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A10]] (D)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a Zener diode?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 4
|
||||
- B. Symbol 1
|
||||
- C. Symbol 11
|
||||
- D. Symbol 5
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A11]] (B)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents an NPN junction transistor?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 1
|
||||
- B. Symbol 2
|
||||
- C. Symbol 7
|
||||
- D. Symbol 11
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A12]] (C)
|
||||
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a solid core transformer?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 4
|
||||
- B. Symbol 7
|
||||
- C. Symbol 6
|
||||
- D. Symbol 1
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7A13]] (A)
|
||||
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a tapped inductor?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 7
|
||||
- B. Symbol 11
|
||||
- C. Symbol 6
|
||||
- D. Symbol 1
|
80
logseq/bak/pages/G7A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.571Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
80
logseq/bak/pages/G7A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.571Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
G7A – Power supplies; schematic symbols
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7A01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the function of a power supply bleeder resistor?
|
||||
- A. It acts as a fuse for excess voltage
|
||||
- B. It discharges the filter capacitors when power is removed
|
||||
- C. It removes shock hazards from the induction coils
|
||||
- D. It eliminates ground loop current
|
||||
- [[G7A02]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following components are used in a power supply filter network?
|
||||
- A. Diodes
|
||||
- B. Transformers and transducers
|
||||
- C. Capacitors and inductors
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G7A03]] (A)
|
||||
Which type of rectifier circuit uses two diodes and a center-tapped transformer?
|
||||
- A. Full-wave
|
||||
- B. Full-wave bridge
|
||||
- C. Half-wave
|
||||
- D. Synchronous
|
||||
- [[G7A04]] (A)
|
||||
What is characteristic of a half-wave rectifier in a power supply?
|
||||
- A. Only one diode is required
|
||||
- B. The ripple frequency is twice that of a full-wave rectifier
|
||||
- C. More current can be drawn from the half-wave rectifier
|
||||
- D. The output voltage is two times the peak input voltage
|
||||
- [[G7A05]] (B)
|
||||
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a half-wave rectifier?
|
||||
- A. 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. 180 degrees
|
||||
- C. 270 degrees
|
||||
- D. 360 degrees
|
||||
- [[G7A06]] (D)
|
||||
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a full-wave rectifier?
|
||||
- A. 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. 180 degrees
|
||||
- C. 270 degrees
|
||||
- D. 360 degrees
|
||||
- [[G7A07]] (A)
|
||||
What is the output waveform of an unfiltered full-wave rectifier connected to a resistive load?
|
||||
- A. A series of DC pulses at twice the frequency of the AC input
|
||||
- B. A series of DC pulses at the same frequency as the AC input
|
||||
- C. A sine wave at half the frequency of the AC input
|
||||
- D. A steady DC voltage
|
||||
- [[G7A08]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of a switchmode power supply as compared to a linear power supply?
|
||||
- A. Faster switching time makes higher output voltage possible
|
||||
- B. Fewer circuit components are required
|
||||
- C. High-frequency operation allows the use of smaller components
|
||||
- D. Inherently more stable
|
||||
- [[G7A09]] (C)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a field effect transistor?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 2
|
||||
- B. Symbol 5
|
||||
- C. Symbol 1
|
||||
- D. Symbol 4
|
||||
- [[G7A10]] (D)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a Zener diode?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 4
|
||||
- B. Symbol 1
|
||||
- C. Symbol 11
|
||||
- D. Symbol 5
|
||||
- [[G7A11]] (B)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents an NPN junction transistor?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 1
|
||||
- B. Symbol 2
|
||||
- C. Symbol 7
|
||||
- D. Symbol 11
|
||||
- [[G7A12]] (C)
|
||||
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a solid core transformer?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 4
|
||||
- B. Symbol 7
|
||||
- C. Symbol 6
|
||||
- D. Symbol 1
|
||||
- [[G7A13]] (A)
|
||||
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a tapped inductor?
|
||||
- A. Symbol 7
|
||||
- B. Symbol 11
|
||||
- C. Symbol 6
|
||||
- D. Symbol 1
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G7B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.972Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G7B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.972Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G7B – Digital circuits; amplifiers and oscillators
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7B01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the purpose of neutralizing an amplifier?
|
||||
- A. To limit the modulation index
|
||||
- B. To eliminate self-oscillations
|
||||
- C. To cut off the final amplifier during standby periods
|
||||
- D. To keep the carrier on frequency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of these classes of amplifiers has the highest efficiency?
|
||||
- A. Class A
|
||||
- B. Class B
|
||||
- C. Class AB
|
||||
- D. Class C
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B03]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes the function of a two-input AND gate?
|
||||
- A. Output is high when either or both inputs are low
|
||||
- B. Output is high only when both inputs are high
|
||||
- C. Output is low when either or both inputs are high
|
||||
- D. Output is low only when both inputs are high
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B04]] (A)
|
||||
In a Class A amplifier, what percentage of the time does the amplifying device conduct?
|
||||
- A. 100%
|
||||
- B. More than 50% but less than 100%
|
||||
- C. 50%
|
||||
- D. Less than 50%
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B05]] (C)
|
||||
How many states does a 3-bit binary counter have?
|
||||
- A. 3
|
||||
- B. 6
|
||||
- C. 8
|
||||
- D. 16
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B06]] (A)
|
||||
What is a shift register?
|
||||
- A. A clocked array of circuits that passes data in steps along the array
|
||||
- B. An array of operational amplifiers used for tri-state arithmetic operations
|
||||
- C. A digital mixer
|
||||
- D. An analog mixer
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are basic components of a sine wave oscillator?
|
||||
- A. An amplifier and a divider
|
||||
- B. A frequency multiplier and a mixer
|
||||
- C. A circulator and a filter operating in a feed-forward loop
|
||||
- D. A filter and an amplifier operating in a feedback loop
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B08]] (B)
|
||||
How is the efficiency of an RF power amplifier determined?
|
||||
- A. Divide the DC input power by the DC output power
|
||||
- B. Divide the RF output power by the DC input power
|
||||
- C. Multiply the RF input power by the reciprocal of the RF output power
|
||||
- D. Add the RF input power to the DC output power
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B09]] (C)
|
||||
What determines the frequency of an LC oscillator?
|
||||
- A. The number of stages in the counter
|
||||
- B. The number of stages in the divider
|
||||
- C. The inductance and capacitance in the tank circuit
|
||||
- D. The time delay of the lag circuit
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a linear amplifier?
|
||||
- A. Any RF power amplifier used in conjunction with an amateur transceiver
|
||||
- B. An amplifier in which the output preserves the input waveform
|
||||
- C. A Class C high efficiency amplifier
|
||||
- D. An amplifier used as a frequency multiplier
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7B11]] (B)
|
||||
For which of the following modes is a Class C power stage appropriate for amplifying a modulated signal?
|
||||
- A. SSB
|
||||
- B. FM
|
||||
- C. AM
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
68
logseq/bak/pages/G7B/2025-05-01T18_49_27.572Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
68
logseq/bak/pages/G7B/2025-05-01T18_49_27.572Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G7B – Digital circuits; amplifiers and oscillators
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7B01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the purpose of neutralizing an amplifier?
|
||||
- A. To limit the modulation index
|
||||
- B. To eliminate self-oscillations
|
||||
- C. To cut off the final amplifier during standby periods
|
||||
- D. To keep the carrier on frequency
|
||||
- [[G7B02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of these classes of amplifiers has the highest efficiency?
|
||||
- A. Class A
|
||||
- B. Class B
|
||||
- C. Class AB
|
||||
- D. Class C
|
||||
- [[G7B03]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes the function of a two-input AND gate?
|
||||
- A. Output is high when either or both inputs are low
|
||||
- B. Output is high only when both inputs are high
|
||||
- C. Output is low when either or both inputs are high
|
||||
- D. Output is low only when both inputs are high
|
||||
- [[G7B04]] (A)
|
||||
In a Class A amplifier, what percentage of the time does the amplifying device conduct?
|
||||
- A. 100%
|
||||
- B. More than 50% but less than 100%
|
||||
- C. 50%
|
||||
- D. Less than 50%
|
||||
- [[G7B05]] (C)
|
||||
How many states does a 3-bit binary counter have?
|
||||
- A. 3
|
||||
- B. 6
|
||||
- C. 8
|
||||
- D. 16
|
||||
- [[G7B06]] (A)
|
||||
What is a shift register?
|
||||
- A. A clocked array of circuits that passes data in steps along the array
|
||||
- B. An array of operational amplifiers used for tri-state arithmetic operations
|
||||
- C. A digital mixer
|
||||
- D. An analog mixer
|
||||
- [[G7B07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are basic components of a sine wave oscillator?
|
||||
- A. An amplifier and a divider
|
||||
- B. A frequency multiplier and a mixer
|
||||
- C. A circulator and a filter operating in a feed-forward loop
|
||||
- D. A filter and an amplifier operating in a feedback loop
|
||||
- [[G7B08]] (B)
|
||||
How is the efficiency of an RF power amplifier determined?
|
||||
- A. Divide the DC input power by the DC output power
|
||||
- B. Divide the RF output power by the DC input power
|
||||
- C. Multiply the RF input power by the reciprocal of the RF output power
|
||||
- D. Add the RF input power to the DC output power
|
||||
- [[G7B09]] (C)
|
||||
What determines the frequency of an LC oscillator?
|
||||
- A. The number of stages in the counter
|
||||
- B. The number of stages in the divider
|
||||
- C. The inductance and capacitance in the tank circuit
|
||||
- D. The time delay of the lag circuit
|
||||
- [[G7B10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a linear amplifier?
|
||||
- A. Any RF power amplifier used in conjunction with an amateur transceiver
|
||||
- B. An amplifier in which the output preserves the input waveform
|
||||
- C. A Class C high efficiency amplifier
|
||||
- D. An amplifier used as a frequency multiplier
|
||||
- [[G7B11]] (B)
|
||||
For which of the following modes is a Class C power stage appropriate for amplifying a modulated signal?
|
||||
- A. SSB
|
||||
- B. FM
|
||||
- C. AM
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
99
logseq/bak/pages/G7C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.972Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
99
logseq/bak/pages/G7C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.972Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
|
||||
G7C – Transceiver design; filters; oscillators; digital signal processing (DSP)
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7C01]] (B)
|
||||
What circuit is used to select one of the sidebands from a balanced modulator?
|
||||
- A. Carrier oscillator
|
||||
- B. Filter
|
||||
- C. IF amplifier
|
||||
- D. RF amplifier
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C02]] (D)
|
||||
What output is produced by a balanced modulator?
|
||||
- A. Frequency modulated RF
|
||||
- B. Audio with equalized frequency response
|
||||
- C. Audio extracted from the modulation signal
|
||||
- D. Double-sideband modulated RF
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C03]] (B)
|
||||
What is one reason to use an impedance matching transformer at a transmitter output?
|
||||
- A. To minimize transmitter power output
|
||||
- B. To present the desired impedance to the transmitter and feed line
|
||||
- C. To reduce power supply ripple
|
||||
- D. To minimize radiation resistance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C04]] (D)
|
||||
How is a product detector used?
|
||||
- A. Used in test gear to detect spurious mixing products
|
||||
- B. Used in transmitter to perform frequency multiplication
|
||||
- C. Used in an FM receiver to filter out unwanted sidebands
|
||||
- D. Used in a single sideband receiver to extract the modulated signal
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C05]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of a direct digital synthesizer (DDS)?
|
||||
- A. Extremely narrow tuning range
|
||||
- B. Relatively high-power output
|
||||
- C. Pure sine wave output
|
||||
- D. Variable output frequency with the stability of a crystal oscillator
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C06]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of a digital signal processing (DSP) filter compared to an analog filter?
|
||||
- A. A wide range of filter bandwidths and shapes can be created
|
||||
- B. Fewer digital components are required
|
||||
- C. Mixing products are greatly reduced
|
||||
- D. The DSP filter is much more effective at VHF frequencies
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C07]] (A)
|
||||
What term specifies a filter’s attenuation inside its passband?
|
||||
- A. Insertion loss
|
||||
- B. Return loss
|
||||
- C. Q
|
||||
- D. Ultimate rejection
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C08]] (D)
|
||||
Which parameter affects receiver sensitivity?
|
||||
- A. Input amplifier gain
|
||||
- B. Demodulator stage bandwidth
|
||||
- C. Input amplifier noise figure
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C09]] (B)
|
||||
What is the phase difference between the I and Q RF signals that software-defined radio (SDR) equipment uses for modulation and demodulation?
|
||||
- A. Zero
|
||||
- B. 90 degrees
|
||||
- C. 180 degrees
|
||||
- D. 45 degrees
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C10]] (B)
|
||||
What is an advantage of using I-Q modulation with software-defined radios (SDRs)?
|
||||
- A. The need for high resolution analog-to-digital converters is eliminated
|
||||
- B. All types of modulation can be created with appropriate processing
|
||||
- C. Minimum detectible signal level is reduced
|
||||
- D. Automatic conversion of the signal from digital to analog
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C11]] (D)
|
||||
Which of these functions is performed by software in a software-defined radio (SDR)?
|
||||
- A. Filtering
|
||||
- B. Detection
|
||||
- C. Modulation
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C12]] (C)
|
||||
What is the frequency above which a low-pass filter’s output power is less than half the input power?
|
||||
- A. Notch frequency
|
||||
- B. Neper frequency
|
||||
- C. Cutoff frequency
|
||||
- D. Rolloff frequency
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C13]] (D)
|
||||
What term specifies a filter’s maximum ability to reject signals outside its passband?
|
||||
- A. Notch depth
|
||||
- B. Rolloff
|
||||
- C. Insertion loss
|
||||
- D. Ultimate rejection
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G7C14]] (A)
|
||||
The bandwidth of a band-pass filter is measured between what two frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Upper and lower half-power
|
||||
- B. Cutoff and rolloff
|
||||
- C. Pole and zero
|
||||
- D. Image and harmonic
|
99
logseq/bak/pages/G8A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.973Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
99
logseq/bak/pages/G8A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.973Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
|
||||
G8A – Carriers and modulation: AM, FM, and single sideband; modulation envelope; digital modulation; overmodulation; link budgets and link margins
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G8A01]] (B)
|
||||
How is direct binary FSK modulation generated?
|
||||
- A. By keying an FM transmitter with a sub-audible tone
|
||||
- B. By changing an oscillator’s frequency directly with a digital control signal
|
||||
- C. By using a transceiver’s computer data interface protocol to change frequencies
|
||||
- D. By reconfiguring the CW keying input to act as a tone generator
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the name of the process that changes the phase angle of an RF signal to convey information?
|
||||
- A. Phase convolution
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Phase transformation
|
||||
- D. Phase inversion
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A03]] (D)
|
||||
What is the name of the process that changes the instantaneous frequency of an RF wave to convey information?
|
||||
- A. Frequency convolution
|
||||
- B. Frequency transformation
|
||||
- C. Frequency conversion
|
||||
- D. Frequency modulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A04]] (B)
|
||||
What emission is produced by a reactance modulator connected to a transmitter RF amplifier stage?
|
||||
- A. Multiplex modulation
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Amplitude modulation
|
||||
- D. Pulse modulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A05]] (D)
|
||||
What type of modulation varies the instantaneous power level of the RF signal?
|
||||
- A. Power modulation
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- D. Amplitude modulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A06]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of QPSK31?
|
||||
- A. It is sideband sensitive
|
||||
- B. Its encoding provides error correction
|
||||
- C. Its bandwidth is approximately the same as BPSK31
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following phone emissions uses the narrowest bandwidth?
|
||||
- A. Single sideband
|
||||
- B. Vestigial sideband
|
||||
- C. Phase modulation
|
||||
- D. Frequency modulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A08]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an effect of overmodulation?
|
||||
- A. Insufficient audio
|
||||
- B. Insufficient bandwidth
|
||||
- C. Frequency drift
|
||||
- D. Excessive bandwidth
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A09]] (A)
|
||||
What type of modulation is used by FT8?
|
||||
- A. 8-tone frequency shift keying
|
||||
- B. Vestigial sideband
|
||||
- C. Amplitude compressed AM
|
||||
- D. 8-bit direct sequence spread spectrum
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A10]] (C)
|
||||
What is meant by the term “flat-topping,” when referring to an amplitude-modulated phone signal?
|
||||
- A. Signal distortion caused by insufficient collector current
|
||||
- B. The transmitter’s automatic level control (ALC) is properly adjusted
|
||||
- C. Signal distortion caused by excessive drive or speech levels
|
||||
- D. The transmitter’s carrier is properly suppressed
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A11]] (A)
|
||||
What is the modulation envelope of an AM signal?
|
||||
- A. The waveform created by connecting the peak values of the modulated signal
|
||||
- B. The carrier frequency that contains the signal
|
||||
- C. Spurious signals that envelop nearby frequencies
|
||||
- D. The bandwidth of the modulated signal
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A12]] (D)
|
||||
What is QPSK modulation?
|
||||
- A. Modulation using quasi-parallel to serial conversion to reduce bandwidth
|
||||
- B. Modulation using quadra-pole sideband keying to generate spread spectrum signals
|
||||
- C. Modulation using Fast Fourier Transforms to generate frequencies at the first, second, third, and fourth harmonics of the carrier frequency to improve noise immunity
|
||||
- D. Modulation in which digital data is transmitted using 0-, 90-, 180- and 270-degrees phase shift to represent pairs of bits
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A13]] (C)
|
||||
What is a link budget?
|
||||
- A. The financial costs associated with operating a radio link
|
||||
- B. The sum of antenna gains minus system losses
|
||||
- C. The sum of transmit power and antenna gains minus system losses as seen at the receiver
|
||||
- D. The difference between transmit power and receiver sensitivity
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8A14]] (B)
|
||||
What is link margin?
|
||||
- A. The opposite of fade margin
|
||||
- B. The difference between received power level and minimum required signal level at the input to the receiver
|
||||
- C. Transmit power minus receiver sensitivity
|
||||
- D. Receiver sensitivity plus 3 dB
|
86
logseq/bak/pages/G8A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.572Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
86
logseq/bak/pages/G8A/2025-05-01T18_49_27.572Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
|
||||
G8A – Carriers and modulation: AM, FM, and single sideband; modulation envelope; digital modulation; overmodulation; link budgets and link margins
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G8A01]] (B)
|
||||
How is direct binary FSK modulation generated?
|
||||
- A. By keying an FM transmitter with a sub-audible tone
|
||||
- B. By changing an oscillator’s frequency directly with a digital control signal
|
||||
- C. By using a transceiver’s computer data interface protocol to change frequencies
|
||||
- D. By reconfiguring the CW keying input to act as a tone generator
|
||||
- [[G8A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the name of the process that changes the phase angle of an RF signal to convey information?
|
||||
- A. Phase convolution
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Phase transformation
|
||||
- D. Phase inversion
|
||||
- [[G8A03]] (D)
|
||||
What is the name of the process that changes the instantaneous frequency of an RF wave to convey information?
|
||||
- A. Frequency convolution
|
||||
- B. Frequency transformation
|
||||
- C. Frequency conversion
|
||||
- D. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A04]] (B)
|
||||
What emission is produced by a reactance modulator connected to a transmitter RF amplifier stage?
|
||||
- A. Multiplex modulation
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Amplitude modulation
|
||||
- D. Pulse modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A05]] (D)
|
||||
What type of modulation varies the instantaneous power level of the RF signal?
|
||||
- A. Power modulation
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- D. Amplitude modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A06]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of QPSK31?
|
||||
- A. It is sideband sensitive
|
||||
- B. Its encoding provides error correction
|
||||
- C. Its bandwidth is approximately the same as BPSK31
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G8A07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following phone emissions uses the narrowest bandwidth?
|
||||
- A. Single sideband
|
||||
- B. Vestigial sideband
|
||||
- C. Phase modulation
|
||||
- D. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A08]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an effect of overmodulation?
|
||||
- A. Insufficient audio
|
||||
- B. Insufficient bandwidth
|
||||
- C. Frequency drift
|
||||
- D. Excessive bandwidth
|
||||
- [[G8A09]] (A)
|
||||
What type of modulation is used by FT8?
|
||||
- A. 8-tone frequency shift keying
|
||||
- B. Vestigial sideband
|
||||
- C. Amplitude compressed AM
|
||||
- D. 8-bit direct sequence spread spectrum
|
||||
- [[G8A10]] (C)
|
||||
What is meant by the term “flat-topping,” when referring to an amplitude-modulated phone signal?
|
||||
- A. Signal distortion caused by insufficient collector current
|
||||
- B. The transmitter’s automatic level control (ALC) is properly adjusted
|
||||
- C. Signal distortion caused by excessive drive or speech levels
|
||||
- D. The transmitter’s carrier is properly suppressed
|
||||
- [[G8A11]] (A)
|
||||
What is the modulation envelope of an AM signal?
|
||||
- A. The waveform created by connecting the peak values of the modulated signal
|
||||
- B. The carrier frequency that contains the signal
|
||||
- C. Spurious signals that envelop nearby frequencies
|
||||
- D. The bandwidth of the modulated signal
|
||||
- [[G8A12]] (D)
|
||||
What is QPSK modulation?
|
||||
- A. Modulation using quasi-parallel to serial conversion to reduce bandwidth
|
||||
- B. Modulation using quadra-pole sideband keying to generate spread spectrum signals
|
||||
- C. Modulation using Fast Fourier Transforms to generate frequencies at the first, second, third, and fourth harmonics of the carrier frequency to improve noise immunity
|
||||
- D. Modulation in which digital data is transmitted using 0-, 90-, 180- and 270-degrees phase shift to represent pairs of bits
|
||||
- [[G8A13]] (C)
|
||||
What is a link budget?
|
||||
- A. The financial costs associated with operating a radio link
|
||||
- B. The sum of antenna gains minus system losses
|
||||
- C. The sum of transmit power and antenna gains minus system losses as seen at the receiver
|
||||
- D. The difference between transmit power and receiver sensitivity
|
||||
- [[G8A14]] (B)
|
||||
What is link margin?
|
||||
- A. The opposite of fade margin
|
||||
- B. The difference between received power level and minimum required signal level at the input to the receiver
|
||||
- C. Transmit power minus receiver sensitivity
|
||||
- D. Receiver sensitivity plus 3 dB
|
92
logseq/bak/pages/G8B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.973Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
92
logseq/bak/pages/G8B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.973Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
|
||||
G8B – Frequency changing; bandwidths of various modes; deviation; intermodulation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G8B01]] (B)
|
||||
Which mixer input is varied or tuned to convert signals of different frequencies to an intermediate frequency (IF)?
|
||||
- A. Image frequency
|
||||
- B. Local oscillator
|
||||
- C. RF input
|
||||
- D. Beat frequency oscillator
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the term for interference from a signal at twice the IF frequency from the desired signal?
|
||||
- A. Quadrature response
|
||||
- B. Image response
|
||||
- C. Mixer interference
|
||||
- D. Intermediate interference
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B03]] (A)
|
||||
What is another term for the mixing of two RF signals?
|
||||
- A. Heterodyning
|
||||
- B. Synthesizing
|
||||
- C. Frequency inversion
|
||||
- D. Phase inversion
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B04]] (D)
|
||||
What is the stage in a VHF FM transmitter that generates a harmonic of a lower frequency signal to reach the desired operating frequency?
|
||||
- A. Mixer
|
||||
- B. Reactance modulator
|
||||
- C. Balanced converter
|
||||
- D. Multiplier
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B05]] (C)
|
||||
Which intermodulation products are closest to the original signal frequencies?
|
||||
- A. Second harmonics
|
||||
- B. Even-order
|
||||
- C. Odd-order
|
||||
- D. Intercept point
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B06]] (D)
|
||||
What is the total bandwidth of an FM phone transmission having 5 kHz deviation and 3 kHz modulating frequency?
|
||||
- A. 3 kHz
|
||||
- B. 5 kHz
|
||||
- C. 8 kHz
|
||||
- D. 16 kHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B07]] (B)
|
||||
What is the frequency deviation for a 12.21 MHz reactance modulated oscillator in a 5 kHz deviation, 146.52 MHz FM phone transmitter?
|
||||
- A. 101.75 Hz
|
||||
- B. 416.7 Hz
|
||||
- C. 5 kHz
|
||||
- D. 60 kHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B08]] (B)
|
||||
Why is it important to know the duty cycle of the mode you are using when transmitting?
|
||||
- A. To aid in tuning your transmitter
|
||||
- B. Some modes have high duty cycles that could exceed the transmitter’s average power rating
|
||||
- C. To allow time for the other station to break in during a transmission
|
||||
- D. To prevent overmodulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B09]] (D)
|
||||
Why is it good to match receiver bandwidth to the bandwidth of the operating mode?
|
||||
- A. It is required by FCC rules
|
||||
- B. It minimizes power consumption in the receiver
|
||||
- C. It improves impedance matching of the antenna
|
||||
- D. It results in the best signal-to-noise ratio
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B10]] (B)
|
||||
What is the relationship between transmitted symbol rate and bandwidth?
|
||||
- A. Symbol rate and bandwidth are not related
|
||||
- B. Higher symbol rates require wider bandwidth
|
||||
- C. Lower symbol rates require wider bandwidth
|
||||
- D. Bandwidth is half the symbol rate
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B11]] (C)
|
||||
What combination of a mixer’s Local Oscillator (LO) and RF input frequencies is found in the output?
|
||||
- A. The ratio
|
||||
- B. The average
|
||||
- C. The sum and difference
|
||||
- D. The arithmetic product
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B12]] (A)
|
||||
What process combines two signals in a non-linear circuit to produce unwanted spurious outputs?
|
||||
- A. Intermodulation
|
||||
- B. Heterodyning
|
||||
- C. Detection
|
||||
- D. Rolloff
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8B13]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is an odd-order intermodulation product of frequencies F1 and F2?
|
||||
- A. 5F1-3F2
|
||||
- B. 3F1-F2
|
||||
- C. 2F1-F2
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
113
logseq/bak/pages/G8C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.975Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
113
logseq/bak/pages/G8C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.975Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
|
||||
G8C – Digital emission modes
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G8C01]] (C)
|
||||
On what band do amateurs share channels with the unlicensed Wi-Fi service?
|
||||
- A. 432 MHz
|
||||
- B. 902 MHz
|
||||
- C. 2.4 GHz
|
||||
- D. 10.7 GHz
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C02]] (A)
|
||||
Which digital mode is used as a low-power beacon for assessing HF propagation?
|
||||
- A. WSPR
|
||||
- B. MFSK16
|
||||
- C. PSK31
|
||||
- D. SSB-SC
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C03]] (C)
|
||||
What part of a packet radio frame contains the routing and handling information?
|
||||
- A. Directory
|
||||
- B. Preamble
|
||||
- C. Header
|
||||
- D. Trailer
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C04]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following describes Baudot code?
|
||||
- A. A 7-bit code with start, stop, and parity bits
|
||||
- B. A code using error detection and correction
|
||||
- C. A 5-bit code with additional start and stop bits
|
||||
- D. A code using SELCAL and LISTEN
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C05]] (A)
|
||||
In an ARQ mode, what is meant by a NAK response to a transmitted packet?
|
||||
- A. Request retransmission of the packet
|
||||
- B. Packet was received without error
|
||||
- C. Receiving station connected and ready for transmissions
|
||||
- D. Entire file received correctly
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C06]] (B)
|
||||
What action results from a failure to exchange information due to excessive transmission attempts when using an ARQ mode?
|
||||
- A. The checksum overflows
|
||||
- B. The connection is dropped
|
||||
- C. Packets will be routed incorrectly
|
||||
- D. Encoding reverts to the default character set
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following narrow-band digital modes can receive signals with very low signal-to-noise ratios?
|
||||
- A. MSK144
|
||||
- B. FT8
|
||||
- C. AMTOR
|
||||
- D. MFSK32
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C08]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true about PSK31?
|
||||
- A. Upper case letters are sent with more power
|
||||
- B. Upper case letters use longer Varicode bit sequences and thus slow down transmission
|
||||
- C. Error correction is used to ensure accurate message reception
|
||||
- D. Higher power is needed as compared to RTTY for similar error rates
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C09]] (B)
|
||||
Which is true of mesh network microwave nodes?
|
||||
- A. Having more nodes increases signal strengths
|
||||
- B. If one node fails, a packet may still reach its target station via an alternate node
|
||||
- C. Links between two nodes in a network may have different frequencies and bandwidths
|
||||
- D. More nodes reduce overall microwave out of band interference
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C10]] (C)
|
||||
How does forward error correction (FEC) allow the receiver to correct data errors?
|
||||
- A. By controlling transmitter output power for optimum signal strength
|
||||
- B. By using the Varicode character set
|
||||
- C. By transmitting redundant information with the data
|
||||
- D. By using a parity bit with each character
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C11]] (D)
|
||||
How are the two separate frequencies of a Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK) signal identified?
|
||||
- A. Dot and dash
|
||||
- B. On and off
|
||||
- C. High and low
|
||||
- D. Mark and space
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C12]] (A)
|
||||
Which type of code is used for sending characters in a PSK31 signal?
|
||||
- A. Varicode
|
||||
- B. Viterbi
|
||||
- C. Volumetric
|
||||
- D. Binary
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C13]] (D)
|
||||
What is indicated on a waterfall display by one or more vertical lines on either side of a data mode or RTTY signal?
|
||||
- A. Long path propagation
|
||||
- B. Backscatter propagation
|
||||
- C. Insufficient modulation
|
||||
- D. Overmodulation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C14]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a waterfall display?
|
||||
- A. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is vertical, time is intensity
|
||||
- B. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is intensity, time is horizontal
|
||||
- C. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is intensity, time is vertical
|
||||
- D. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is horizontal, time is intensity
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C15]] (C)
|
||||
What does an FT8 signal report of +3 mean?
|
||||
- A. The signal is 3 times the noise level of an equivalent SSB signal
|
||||
- B. The signal is S3 (weak signals)
|
||||
- C. The signal-to-noise ratio is equivalent to +3dB in a 2.5 kHz bandwidth
|
||||
- D. The signal is 3 dB over S9
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G8C16]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following provide digital voice modes?
|
||||
- A. WSPR, MFSK16, and EasyPAL
|
||||
- B. FT8, FT4, and FST4
|
||||
- C. Winlink, PACTOR II, and PACTOR III
|
||||
- D. DMR, D-STAR, and SystemFusion
|
78
logseq/bak/pages/G9A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.974Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
78
logseq/bak/pages/G9A/2025-05-01T18_48_55.974Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
G9A – Feed lines: characteristic impedance and attenuation; standing wave ratio (SWR) calculation, measurement, and effects; antenna feed point matching
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9A01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following factors determine the characteristic impedance of a parallel conductor feed line?
|
||||
- A. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the radius of the conductors
|
||||
- B. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the length of the line
|
||||
- C. The radius of the conductors and the frequency of the signal
|
||||
- D. The frequency of the signal and the length of the line
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the relationship between high standing wave ratio (SWR) and transmission line loss?
|
||||
- A. There is no relationship between transmission line loss and SWR
|
||||
- B. High SWR increases loss in a lossy transmission line
|
||||
- C. High SWR makes it difficult to measure transmission line loss
|
||||
- D. High SWR reduces the relative effect of transmission line loss
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A03]] (D)
|
||||
What is the nominal characteristic impedance of “window line” transmission line?
|
||||
- A. 50 ohms
|
||||
- B. 75 ohms
|
||||
- C. 100 ohms
|
||||
- D. 450 ohms
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A04]] (C)
|
||||
What causes reflected power at an antenna’s feed point?
|
||||
- A. Operating an antenna at its resonant frequency
|
||||
- B. Using more transmitter power than the antenna can handle
|
||||
- C. A difference between feed line impedance and antenna feed point impedance
|
||||
- D. Feeding the antenna with unbalanced feed line
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A05]] (B)
|
||||
How does the attenuation of coaxial cable change with increasing frequency?
|
||||
- A. Attenuation is independent of frequency
|
||||
- B. Attenuation increases
|
||||
- C. Attenuation decreases
|
||||
- D. Attenuation follows Marconi’s Law of Attenuation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A06]] (D)
|
||||
In what units is RF feed line loss usually expressed?
|
||||
- A. Ohms per 1,000 feet
|
||||
- B. Decibels per 1,000 feet
|
||||
- C. Ohms per 100 feet
|
||||
- D. Decibels per 100 feet
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A07]] (D)
|
||||
What must be done to prevent standing waves on a feed line connected to an antenna?
|
||||
- A. The antenna feed point must be at DC ground potential
|
||||
- B. The feed line must be an odd number of electrical quarter wavelengths long
|
||||
- C. The feed line must be an even number of physical half wavelengths long
|
||||
- D. The antenna feed point impedance must be matched to the characteristic impedance of the feed line
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A08]] (B)
|
||||
If the SWR on an antenna feed line is 5:1, and a matching network at the transmitter end of the feed line is adjusted to present a 1:1 SWR to the transmitter, what is the resulting SWR on the feed line?
|
||||
- A. 1:1
|
||||
- B. 5:1
|
||||
- C. Between 1:1 and 5:1 depending on the characteristic impedance of the line
|
||||
- D. Between 1:1 and 5:1 depending on the reflected power at the transmitter
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A09]] (A)
|
||||
What standing wave ratio results from connecting a 50-ohm feed line to a 200-ohm resistive load?
|
||||
- A. 4:1
|
||||
- B. 1:4
|
||||
- C. 2:1
|
||||
- D. 1:2
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A10]] (D)
|
||||
What standing wave ratio results from connecting a 50-ohm feed line to a 10-ohm resistive load?
|
||||
- A. 2:1
|
||||
- B. 1:2
|
||||
- C. 1:5
|
||||
- D. 5:1
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9A11]] (A)
|
||||
What is the effect of transmission line loss on SWR measured at the input to the line?
|
||||
- A. Higher loss reduces SWR measured at the input to the line
|
||||
- B. Higher loss increases SWR measured at the input to the line
|
||||
- C. Higher loss increases the accuracy of SWR measured at the input to the line
|
||||
- D. Transmission line loss does not affect the SWR measurement
|
85
logseq/bak/pages/G9B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.976Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
85
logseq/bak/pages/G9B/2025-05-01T18_48_55.976Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G9B – Basic dipole and monopole antennas
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9B01]] (B)
|
||||
What is a characteristic of a random-wire HF antenna connected directly to the transmitter?
|
||||
- A. It must be longer than 1 wavelength
|
||||
- B. Station equipment may carry significant RF current
|
||||
- C. It produces only vertically polarized radiation
|
||||
- D. It is more effective on the lower HF bands than on the higher bands
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B02]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following is a common way to adjust the feed point impedance of an elevated quarter-wave ground-plane vertical antenna to be approximately 50 ohms?
|
||||
- A. Slope the radials upward
|
||||
- B. Slope the radials downward
|
||||
- C. Lengthen the radials beyond one wavelength
|
||||
- D. Coil the radials
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B03]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following best describes the radiation pattern of a quarter-wave ground-plane vertical antenna?
|
||||
- A. Bi-directional in azimuth
|
||||
- B. Isotropic
|
||||
- C. Hemispherical
|
||||
- D. Omnidirectional in azimuth
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B04]] (A)
|
||||
What is the radiation pattern of a dipole antenna in free space in a plane containing the conductor?
|
||||
- A. It is a figure-eight at right angles to the antenna
|
||||
- B. It is a figure-eight off both ends of the antenna
|
||||
- C. It is a circle (equal radiation in all directions)
|
||||
- D. It has a pair of lobes on one side of the antenna and a single lobe on the other side
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B05]] (C)
|
||||
How does antenna height affect the azimuthal radiation pattern of a horizontal dipole HF antenna at elevation angles higher than about 45 degrees?
|
||||
- A. If the antenna is too high, the pattern becomes unpredictable
|
||||
- B. Antenna height has no effect on the pattern
|
||||
- C. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, the azimuthal pattern is almost omnidirectional
|
||||
- D. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, radiation off the ends of the wire is eliminated
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B06]] (C)
|
||||
Where should the radial wires of a ground-mounted vertical antenna system be placed?
|
||||
- A. As high as possible above the ground
|
||||
- B. Parallel to the antenna element
|
||||
- C. On the surface or buried a few inches below the ground
|
||||
- D. At the center of the antenna
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B07]] (B)
|
||||
How does the feed point impedance of a horizontal 1/2 wave dipole antenna change as the antenna height is reduced to 1/10 wavelength above ground?
|
||||
- A. It steadily increases
|
||||
- B. It steadily decreases
|
||||
- C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength above ground
|
||||
- D. It is unaffected by the height above ground
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B08]] (A)
|
||||
How does the feed point impedance of a 1/2 wave dipole change as the feed point is moved from the center toward the ends?
|
||||
- A. It steadily increases
|
||||
- B. It steadily decreases
|
||||
- C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength from the end
|
||||
- D. It is unaffected by the location of the feed point
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B09]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of using a horizontally polarized as compared to a vertically polarized HF antenna?
|
||||
- A. Lower ground losses
|
||||
- B. Lower feed point impedance
|
||||
- C. Shorter radials
|
||||
- D. Lower radiation resistance
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B10]] (D)
|
||||
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 14.250 MHz?
|
||||
- A. 8 feet
|
||||
- B. 16 feet
|
||||
- C. 24 feet
|
||||
- D. 33 feet
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B11]] (C)
|
||||
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 3.550 MHz?
|
||||
- A. 42 feet
|
||||
- B. 84 feet
|
||||
- C. 132 feet
|
||||
- D. 263 feet
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9B12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the approximate length for a 1/4 wave monopole antenna cut for 28.5 MHz?
|
||||
- A. 8 feet
|
||||
- B. 11 feet
|
||||
- C. 16 feet
|
||||
- D. 21 feet
|
81
logseq/bak/pages/G9C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.975Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
81
logseq/bak/pages/G9C/2025-05-01T18_48_55.975Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
|
||||
G9C – Directional antennas
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9C01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following would increase the bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. Larger-diameter elements
|
||||
- B. Closer element spacing
|
||||
- C. Loading coils in series with the element
|
||||
- D. Tapered-diameter elements
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate length of the driven element of a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. 1/4 wavelength
|
||||
- B. 1/2 wavelength
|
||||
- C. 3/4 wavelength
|
||||
- D. 1 wavelength
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C03]] (A)
|
||||
How do the lengths of a three-element Yagi reflector and director compare to that of the driven element?
|
||||
- A. The reflector is longer, and the director is shorter
|
||||
- B. The reflector is shorter, and the director is longer
|
||||
- C. They are all the same length
|
||||
- D. Relative length depends on the frequency of operation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C04]] (B)
|
||||
How does antenna gain in dBi compare to gain stated in dBd for the same antenna?
|
||||
- A. Gain in dBi is 2.15 dB lower
|
||||
- B. Gain in dBi is 2.15 dB higher
|
||||
- C. Gain in dBd is 1.25 dBd lower
|
||||
- D. Gain in dBd is 1.25 dBd higher
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C05]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary effect of increasing boom length and adding directors to a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. Gain increases
|
||||
- B. Beamwidth increases
|
||||
- C. Front-to-back ratio decreases
|
||||
- D. Resonant frequency is lower
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C06]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9C07]] (C)
|
||||
What does “front-to-back ratio” mean in reference to a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. The number of directors versus the number of reflectors
|
||||
- B. The relative position of the driven element with respect to the reflectors and directors
|
||||
- C. The power radiated in the major lobe compared to that in the opposite direction
|
||||
- D. The ratio of forward gain to dipole gain
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C08]] (D)
|
||||
What is meant by the “main lobe” of a directive antenna?
|
||||
- A. The magnitude of the maximum vertical angle of radiation
|
||||
- B. The point of maximum current in a radiating antenna element
|
||||
- C. The maximum voltage standing wave point on a radiating element
|
||||
- D. The direction of maximum radiated field strength from the antenna
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C09]] (B)
|
||||
In free space, how does the gain of two three-element, horizontally polarized Yagi antennas spaced vertically 1/2 wavelength apart typically compare to the gain of a single three-element Yagi?
|
||||
- A. Approximately 1.5 dB higher
|
||||
- B. Approximately 3 dB higher
|
||||
- C. Approximately 6 dB higher
|
||||
- D. Approximately 9 dB higher
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C10]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following can be adjusted to optimize forward gain, front-to-back ratio, or SWR bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. The physical length of the boom
|
||||
- B. The number of elements on the boom
|
||||
- C. The spacing of each element along the boom
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C11]] (A)
|
||||
What is a beta or hairpin match?
|
||||
- A. A shorted transmission line stub placed at the feed point of a Yagi antenna to provide impedance matching
|
||||
- B. A 1/4 wavelength section of 75-ohm coax in series with the feed point of a Yagi to provide impedance matching
|
||||
- C. A series capacitor selected to cancel the inductive reactance of a folded dipole antenna
|
||||
- D. A section of 300-ohm twin-lead transmission line used to match a folded dipole antenna
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9C12]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is a characteristic of using a gamma match with a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. It does not require the driven element to be insulated from the boom
|
||||
- B. It does not require any inductors or capacitors
|
||||
- C. It is useful for matching multiband antennas
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
71
logseq/bak/pages/G9C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.573Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
71
logseq/bak/pages/G9C/2025-05-01T18_49_27.573Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
|
||||
G9C – Directional antennas
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9C01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following would increase the bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. Larger-diameter elements
|
||||
- B. Closer element spacing
|
||||
- C. Loading coils in series with the element
|
||||
- D. Tapered-diameter elements
|
||||
- [[G9C02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate length of the driven element of a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. 1/4 wavelength
|
||||
- B. 1/2 wavelength
|
||||
- C. 3/4 wavelength
|
||||
- D. 1 wavelength
|
||||
- [[G9C03]] (A)
|
||||
How do the lengths of a three-element Yagi reflector and director compare to that of the driven element?
|
||||
- A. The reflector is longer, and the director is shorter
|
||||
- B. The reflector is shorter, and the director is longer
|
||||
- C. They are all the same length
|
||||
- D. Relative length depends on the frequency of operation
|
||||
- [[G9C04]] (B)
|
||||
How does antenna gain in dBi compare to gain stated in dBd for the same antenna?
|
||||
- A. Gain in dBi is 2.15 dB lower
|
||||
- B. Gain in dBi is 2.15 dB higher
|
||||
- C. Gain in dBd is 1.25 dBd lower
|
||||
- D. Gain in dBd is 1.25 dBd higher
|
||||
- [[G9C05]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary effect of increasing boom length and adding directors to a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. Gain increases
|
||||
- B. Beamwidth increases
|
||||
- C. Front-to-back ratio decreases
|
||||
- D. Resonant frequency is lower
|
||||
- [[G9C06]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9C07]] (C)
|
||||
What does “front-to-back ratio” mean in reference to a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. The number of directors versus the number of reflectors
|
||||
- B. The relative position of the driven element with respect to the reflectors and directors
|
||||
- C. The power radiated in the major lobe compared to that in the opposite direction
|
||||
- D. The ratio of forward gain to dipole gain
|
||||
- [[G9C08]] (D)
|
||||
What is meant by the “main lobe” of a directive antenna?
|
||||
- A. The magnitude of the maximum vertical angle of radiation
|
||||
- B. The point of maximum current in a radiating antenna element
|
||||
- C. The maximum voltage standing wave point on a radiating element
|
||||
- D. The direction of maximum radiated field strength from the antenna
|
||||
- [[G9C09]] (B)
|
||||
In free space, how does the gain of two three-element, horizontally polarized Yagi antennas spaced vertically 1/2 wavelength apart typically compare to the gain of a single three-element Yagi?
|
||||
- A. Approximately 1.5 dB higher
|
||||
- B. Approximately 3 dB higher
|
||||
- C. Approximately 6 dB higher
|
||||
- D. Approximately 9 dB higher
|
||||
- [[G9C10]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following can be adjusted to optimize forward gain, front-to-back ratio, or SWR bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. The physical length of the boom
|
||||
- B. The number of elements on the boom
|
||||
- C. The spacing of each element along the boom
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G9C11]] (A)
|
||||
What is a beta or hairpin match?
|
||||
- A. A shorted transmission line stub placed at the feed point of a Yagi antenna to provide impedance matching
|
||||
- B. A 1/4 wavelength section of 75-ohm coax in series with the feed point of a Yagi to provide impedance matching
|
||||
- C. A series capacitor selected to cancel the inductive reactance of a folded dipole antenna
|
||||
- D. A section of 300-ohm twin-lead transmission line used to match a folded dipole antenna
|
||||
- [[G9C12]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is a characteristic of using a gamma match with a Yagi antenna?
|
||||
- A. It does not require the driven element to be insulated from the boom
|
||||
- B. It does not require any inductors or capacitors
|
||||
- C. It is useful for matching multiband antennas
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
92
logseq/bak/pages/G9D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.974Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
92
logseq/bak/pages/G9D/2025-05-01T18_48_55.974Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
|
||||
G9D – Specialized antenna types and applications
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9D01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following antenna types will be most effective as a near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS) antenna for short-skip communications on 40 meters during the day?
|
||||
- A. A horizontal dipole placed between 1/10 and 1/4 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- B. A vertical antenna placed between 1/4 and 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- C. A horizontal dipole placed at approximately 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- D. A vertical dipole placed at approximately 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D02]] (D)
|
||||
What is the feed point impedance of an end-fed half-wave antenna?
|
||||
- A. Very low
|
||||
- B. Approximately 50 ohms
|
||||
- C. Approximately 300 ohms
|
||||
- D. Very high
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D03]] (C)
|
||||
In which direction is the maximum radiation from a VHF/UHF “halo” antenna?
|
||||
- A. Broadside to the plane of the halo
|
||||
- B. Opposite the feed point
|
||||
- C. Omnidirectional in the plane of the halo
|
||||
- D. On the same side as the feed point
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D04]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary function of antenna traps?
|
||||
- A. To enable multiband operation
|
||||
- B. To notch spurious frequencies
|
||||
- C. To provide balanced feed point impedance
|
||||
- D. To prevent out-of-band operation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D05]] (D)
|
||||
What is an advantage of vertically stacking horizontally polarized Yagi antennas?
|
||||
- A. It allows quick selection of vertical or horizontal polarization
|
||||
- B. It allows simultaneous vertical and horizontal polarization
|
||||
- C. It narrows the main lobe in azimuth
|
||||
- D. It narrows the main lobe in elevation
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D06]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of a log-periodic antenna?
|
||||
- A. Wide bandwidth
|
||||
- B. Higher gain per element than a Yagi antenna
|
||||
- C. Harmonic suppression
|
||||
- D. Polarization diversity
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a log-periodic antenna?
|
||||
- A. Element length and spacing vary logarithmically along the boom
|
||||
- B. Impedance varies periodically as a function of frequency
|
||||
- C. Gain varies logarithmically as a function of frequency
|
||||
- D. SWR varies periodically as a function of boom length
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D08]] (B)
|
||||
How does a “screwdriver” mobile antenna adjust its feed point impedance?
|
||||
- A. By varying its body capacitance
|
||||
- B. By varying the base loading inductance
|
||||
- C. By extending and retracting the whip
|
||||
- D. By deploying a capacitance hat
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D09]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary use of a Beverage antenna?
|
||||
- A. Directional receiving for MF and low HF bands
|
||||
- B. Directional transmitting for low HF bands
|
||||
- C. Portable direction finding at higher HF frequencies
|
||||
- D. Portable direction finding at lower HF frequencies
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D10]] (B)
|
||||
In which direction or directions does an electrically small loop (less than 1/10 wavelength in circumference) have nulls in its radiation pattern?
|
||||
- A. In the plane of the loop
|
||||
- B. Broadside to the loop
|
||||
- C. Broadside and in the plane of the loop
|
||||
- D. Electrically small loops are omnidirectional
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D11]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is a disadvantage of multiband antennas?
|
||||
- A. They present low impedance on all design frequencies
|
||||
- B. They must be used with an antenna tuner
|
||||
- C. They must be fed with open wire line
|
||||
- D. They have poor harmonic rejection
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the common name of a dipole with a single central support?
|
||||
- A. Inverted V
|
||||
- B. Inverted L
|
||||
- C. Sloper
|
||||
- D. Lazy H
|
||||
--
|
||||
- [[G9D13]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SUBELEMENT G0 – ELECTRICAL AND RF SAFETY [2 Exam Questions – 2 Groups]
|
||||
|
80
logseq/bak/pages/G9D/2025-05-01T18_49_27.574Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
80
logseq/bak/pages/G9D/2025-05-01T18_49_27.574Z.Desktop.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
G9D – Specialized antenna types and applications
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9D01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following antenna types will be most effective as a near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS) antenna for short-skip communications on 40 meters during the day?
|
||||
- A. A horizontal dipole placed between 1/10 and 1/4 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- B. A vertical antenna placed between 1/4 and 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- C. A horizontal dipole placed at approximately 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- D. A vertical dipole placed at approximately 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- [[G9D02]] (D)
|
||||
What is the feed point impedance of an end-fed half-wave antenna?
|
||||
- A. Very low
|
||||
- B. Approximately 50 ohms
|
||||
- C. Approximately 300 ohms
|
||||
- D. Very high
|
||||
- [[G9D03]] (C)
|
||||
In which direction is the maximum radiation from a VHF/UHF “halo” antenna?
|
||||
- A. Broadside to the plane of the halo
|
||||
- B. Opposite the feed point
|
||||
- C. Omnidirectional in the plane of the halo
|
||||
- D. On the same side as the feed point
|
||||
- [[G9D04]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary function of antenna traps?
|
||||
- A. To enable multiband operation
|
||||
- B. To notch spurious frequencies
|
||||
- C. To provide balanced feed point impedance
|
||||
- D. To prevent out-of-band operation
|
||||
- [[G9D05]] (D)
|
||||
What is an advantage of vertically stacking horizontally polarized Yagi antennas?
|
||||
- A. It allows quick selection of vertical or horizontal polarization
|
||||
- B. It allows simultaneous vertical and horizontal polarization
|
||||
- C. It narrows the main lobe in azimuth
|
||||
- D. It narrows the main lobe in elevation
|
||||
- [[G9D06]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of a log-periodic antenna?
|
||||
- A. Wide bandwidth
|
||||
- B. Higher gain per element than a Yagi antenna
|
||||
- C. Harmonic suppression
|
||||
- D. Polarization diversity
|
||||
- [[G9D07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a log-periodic antenna?
|
||||
- A. Element length and spacing vary logarithmically along the boom
|
||||
- B. Impedance varies periodically as a function of frequency
|
||||
- C. Gain varies logarithmically as a function of frequency
|
||||
- D. SWR varies periodically as a function of boom length
|
||||
- [[G9D08]] (B)
|
||||
How does a “screwdriver” mobile antenna adjust its feed point impedance?
|
||||
- A. By varying its body capacitance
|
||||
- B. By varying the base loading inductance
|
||||
- C. By extending and retracting the whip
|
||||
- D. By deploying a capacitance hat
|
||||
- [[G9D09]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary use of a Beverage antenna?
|
||||
- A. Directional receiving for MF and low HF bands
|
||||
- B. Directional transmitting for low HF bands
|
||||
- C. Portable direction finding at higher HF frequencies
|
||||
- D. Portable direction finding at lower HF frequencies
|
||||
- [[G9D10]] (B)
|
||||
In which direction or directions does an electrically small loop (less than 1/10 wavelength in circumference) have nulls in its radiation pattern?
|
||||
- A. In the plane of the loop
|
||||
- B. Broadside to the loop
|
||||
- C. Broadside and in the plane of the loop
|
||||
- D. Electrically small loops are omnidirectional
|
||||
- [[G9D11]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is a disadvantage of multiband antennas?
|
||||
- A. They present low impedance on all design frequencies
|
||||
- B. They must be used with an antenna tuner
|
||||
- C. They must be fed with open wire line
|
||||
- D. They have poor harmonic rejection
|
||||
- [[G9D12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the common name of a dipole with a single central support?
|
||||
- A. Inverted V
|
||||
- B. Inverted L
|
||||
- C. Sloper
|
||||
- D. Lazy H
|
||||
- [[G9D13]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SUBELEMENT G0 – ELECTRICAL AND RF SAFETY [2 Exam Questions – 2 Groups]
|
||||
|
421
logseq/config.edn
Normal file
421
logseq/config.edn
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,421 @@
|
||||
{:meta/version 1
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set the preferred format.
|
||||
;; Available options:
|
||||
;; - Markdown (default)
|
||||
;; - Org
|
||||
;; :preferred-format "Markdown"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set the preferred workflow style.
|
||||
;; Available options:
|
||||
;; - :now for NOW/LATER style (default)
|
||||
;; - :todo for TODO/DOING style
|
||||
:preferred-workflow :now
|
||||
|
||||
;; Exclude directories/files.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :hidden ["/archived" "/test.md" "../assets/archived"]
|
||||
:hidden []
|
||||
|
||||
;; Define the default journal page template.
|
||||
;; Enter the template name between the quotes.
|
||||
:default-templates
|
||||
{:journals ""}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set a custom date format for the journal page title.
|
||||
;; Default value: "MMM do, yyyy"
|
||||
;; e.g., "Jan 19th, 2038"
|
||||
;; Example usage e.g., "Tue 19th, Jan 2038"
|
||||
;; :journal/page-title-format "EEE do, MMM yyyy"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Specify the journal filename format using a valid date format string.
|
||||
;; !Warning:
|
||||
;; This configuration is not retroactive and affects only new journals.
|
||||
;; To show old journal files in the app, manually rename the files in the
|
||||
;; journal directory to match the new format.
|
||||
;; Default value: "yyyy_MM_dd"
|
||||
;; :journal/file-name-format "yyyy_MM_dd"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enable tooltip preview on hover.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
:ui/enable-tooltip? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Display brackets [[]] around page references.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :ui/show-brackets? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Display all lines of a block when referencing ((block)).
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
:ui/show-full-blocks? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Automatically expand block references when zooming in.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
:ui/auto-expand-block-refs? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enable Block timestamps.
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
:feature/enable-block-timestamps? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Disable accent marks when searching.
|
||||
;; After changing this setting, rebuild the search index by pressing (^C ^S).
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
:feature/enable-search-remove-accents? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enable journals.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :feature/enable-journals? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enable flashcards.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :feature/enable-flashcards? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enable whiteboards.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :feature/enable-whiteboards? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Disable the journal's built-in 'Scheduled tasks and deadlines' query.
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :feature/disable-scheduled-and-deadline-query? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Specify the number of days displayed in the future for
|
||||
;; the 'scheduled tasks and deadlines' query.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; Display all scheduled and deadline blocks for the next 14 days:
|
||||
;; :scheduled/future-days 14
|
||||
;; Default value: 7
|
||||
;; :scheduled/future-days 7
|
||||
|
||||
;; Specify the first day of the week.
|
||||
;; Available options:
|
||||
;; - integer from 0 to 6 (Monday to Sunday)
|
||||
;; Default value: 6 (Sunday)
|
||||
:start-of-week 6
|
||||
|
||||
;; Specify a custom CSS import.
|
||||
;; This option takes precedence over the local `logseq/custom.css` file.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :custom-css-url "@import url('https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/gh/dracula/logseq@master/custom.css');"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Specify a custom JS import.
|
||||
;; This option takes precedence over the local `logseq/custom.js` file.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :custom-js-url "https://cdn.logseq.com/custom.js"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set a custom Arweave gateway
|
||||
;; Default gateway: https://arweave.net
|
||||
;; :arweave/gateway "https://arweave.net"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set bullet indentation when exporting
|
||||
;; Available options:
|
||||
;; - `:eight-spaces` as eight spaces
|
||||
;; - `:four-spaces` as four spaces
|
||||
;; - `:two-spaces` as two spaces
|
||||
;; - `:tab` as a tab character (default)
|
||||
;; :export/bullet-indentation :tab
|
||||
|
||||
;; Publish all pages within the Graph
|
||||
;; Regardless of whether individual pages have been marked as public.
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :publishing/all-pages-public? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Define the default home page and sidebar status.
|
||||
;; If unspecified, the journal page will be loaded on startup and the right sidebar will stay hidden.
|
||||
;; The `:page` value represents the name of the page displayed at startup.
|
||||
;; Available options for `:sidebar` are:
|
||||
;; - "Contents" to display the Contents page in the right sidebar.
|
||||
;; - A specific page name to display in the right sidebar.
|
||||
;; - An array of multiple pages, e.g., ["Contents" "Page A" "Page B"].
|
||||
;; If `:sidebar` remains unset, the right sidebar will stay hidden.
|
||||
;; Examples:
|
||||
;; 1. Set "Changelog" as the home page and display "Contents" in the right sidebar:
|
||||
;; :default-home {:page "Changelog", :sidebar "Contents"}
|
||||
;; 2. Set "Jun 3rd, 2021" as the home page without the right sidebar:
|
||||
;; :default-home {:page "Jun 3rd, 2021"}
|
||||
;; 3. Set "home" as the home page and display multiple pages in the right sidebar:
|
||||
;; :default-home {:page "home", :sidebar ["Page A" "Page B"]}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set the default location for storing notes.
|
||||
;; Default value: "pages"
|
||||
;; :pages-directory "pages"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set the default location for storing journals.
|
||||
;; Default value: "journals"
|
||||
;; :journals-directory "journals"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set the default location for storing whiteboards.
|
||||
;; Default value: "whiteboards"
|
||||
;; :whiteboards-directory "whiteboards"
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enabling this option converts
|
||||
;; [[Grant Ideas]] to [[file:./grant_ideas.org][Grant Ideas]] for org-mode.
|
||||
;; For more information, visit https://github.com/logseq/logseq/issues/672
|
||||
;; :org-mode/insert-file-link? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Configure custom shortcuts.
|
||||
;; Syntax:
|
||||
;; 1. + indicates simultaneous key presses, e.g., `Ctrl+Shift+a`.
|
||||
;; 2. A space between keys represents key chords, e.g., `t s` means
|
||||
;; pressing `t` followed by `s`.
|
||||
;; 3. mod refers to `Ctrl` for Windows/Linux and `Command` for Mac.
|
||||
;; 4. Use false to disable a specific shortcut.
|
||||
;; 5. You can define multiple bindings for a single action, e.g., ["ctrl+j" "down"].
|
||||
;; The full list of configurable shortcuts is available at:
|
||||
;; https://github.com/logseq/logseq/blob/master/src/main/frontend/modules/shortcut/config.cljs
|
||||
;; Example:
|
||||
;; :shortcuts
|
||||
;; {:editor/new-block "enter"
|
||||
;; :editor/new-line "shift+enter"
|
||||
;; :editor/insert-link "mod+shift+k"
|
||||
;; :editor/highlight false
|
||||
;; :ui/toggle-settings "t s"
|
||||
;; :editor/up ["ctrl+k" "up"]
|
||||
;; :editor/down ["ctrl+j" "down"]
|
||||
;; :editor/left ["ctrl+h" "left"]
|
||||
;; :editor/right ["ctrl+l" "right"]}
|
||||
:shortcuts {}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Configure the behavior of pressing Enter in document mode.
|
||||
;; if set to true, pressing Enter will create a new block.
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
:shortcut/doc-mode-enter-for-new-block? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Block content larger than `block/content-max-length` will not be searchable
|
||||
;; or editable for performance.
|
||||
;; Default value: 10000
|
||||
:block/content-max-length 10000
|
||||
|
||||
;; Display command documentation on hover.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
:ui/show-command-doc? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Display empty bullet points.
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
:ui/show-empty-bullets? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Pre-defined :view function to use with advanced queries.
|
||||
:query/views
|
||||
{:pprint
|
||||
(fn [r] [:pre.code (pprint r)])}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Advanced queries `:result-transform` function.
|
||||
;; Transform the query result before displaying it.
|
||||
:query/result-transforms
|
||||
{:sort-by-priority
|
||||
(fn [result] (sort-by (fn [h] (get h :block/priority "Z")) result))}
|
||||
|
||||
;; The following queries will be displayed at the bottom of today's journal page.
|
||||
;; The "NOW" query returns tasks with "NOW" or "DOING" status.
|
||||
;; The "NEXT" query returns tasks with "NOW", "LATER", or "TODO" status.
|
||||
:default-queries
|
||||
{:journals
|
||||
[{:title "🔨 NOW"
|
||||
:query [:find (pull ?h [*])
|
||||
:in $ ?start ?today
|
||||
:where
|
||||
[?h :block/marker ?marker]
|
||||
[(contains? #{"NOW" "DOING"} ?marker)]
|
||||
[?h :block/page ?p]
|
||||
[?p :block/journal? true]
|
||||
[?p :block/journal-day ?d]
|
||||
[(>= ?d ?start)]
|
||||
[(<= ?d ?today)]]
|
||||
:inputs [:14d :today]
|
||||
:result-transform (fn [result]
|
||||
(sort-by (fn [h]
|
||||
(get h :block/priority "Z")) result))
|
||||
:group-by-page? false
|
||||
:collapsed? false}
|
||||
{:title "📅 NEXT"
|
||||
:query [:find (pull ?h [*])
|
||||
:in $ ?start ?next
|
||||
:where
|
||||
[?h :block/marker ?marker]
|
||||
[(contains? #{"NOW" "LATER" "TODO"} ?marker)]
|
||||
[?h :block/page ?p]
|
||||
[?p :block/journal? true]
|
||||
[?p :block/journal-day ?d]
|
||||
[(> ?d ?start)]
|
||||
[(< ?d ?next)]]
|
||||
:inputs [:today :7d-after]
|
||||
:group-by-page? false
|
||||
:collapsed? false}]}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Add custom commands to the command palette
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :commands
|
||||
;; [
|
||||
;; ["js" "Javascript"]
|
||||
;; ["md" "Markdown"]
|
||||
;; ]
|
||||
:commands []
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enable collapsing blocks with titles but no children.
|
||||
;; By default, only blocks with children can be collapsed.
|
||||
;; Setting `:outliner/block-title-collapse-enabled?` to true allows collapsing
|
||||
;; blocks with titles (multiple lines) and content. For example:
|
||||
;; - block title
|
||||
;; block content
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
:outliner/block-title-collapse-enabled? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Macros replace texts and will make you more productive.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; Change the :macros value below to:
|
||||
;; {"poem" "Rose is $1, violet's $2. Life's ordered: Org assists you."}
|
||||
;; input "{{poem red,blue}}"
|
||||
;; becomes
|
||||
;; Rose is red, violet's blue. Life's ordered: Org assists you.
|
||||
:macros {}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Configure the default expansion level for linked references.
|
||||
;; For example, consider the following block hierarchy:
|
||||
;; - a [[page]] (level 1)
|
||||
;; - b (level 2)
|
||||
;; - c (level 3)
|
||||
;; - d (level 4)
|
||||
;;
|
||||
;; With the default value of level 2, block b will be collapsed.
|
||||
;; If the level's value is set to 3, block c will be collapsed.
|
||||
;; Default value: 2
|
||||
:ref/default-open-blocks-level 2
|
||||
|
||||
;; Configure the threshold for linked references before collapsing.
|
||||
;; Default value: 100
|
||||
:ref/linked-references-collapsed-threshold 50
|
||||
|
||||
;; Graph view configuration.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :graph/settings
|
||||
;; {:orphan-pages? true ; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :builtin-pages? false ; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :excluded-pages? false ; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :journal? false} ; Default value: false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Graph view configuration.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :graph/forcesettings
|
||||
;; {:link-dist 180 ; Default value: 180
|
||||
;; :charge-strength -600 ; Default value: -600
|
||||
;; :charge-range 600} ; Default value: 600
|
||||
|
||||
;; Favorites to list on the left sidebar
|
||||
:favorites []
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set flashcards interval.
|
||||
;; Expected value:
|
||||
;; - Float between 0 and 1
|
||||
;; higher values result in faster changes to the next review interval.
|
||||
;; Default value: 0.5
|
||||
;; :srs/learning-fraction 0.5
|
||||
|
||||
;; Set the initial interval after the first successful review of a card.
|
||||
;; Default value: 4
|
||||
;; :srs/initial-interval 4
|
||||
|
||||
;; Hide specific block properties.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :block-hidden-properties #{:public :icon}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Create a page for all properties.
|
||||
;; Default value: true
|
||||
:property-pages/enabled? true
|
||||
|
||||
;; Properties to exclude from having property pages
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :property-pages/excludelist #{:duration :author}
|
||||
|
||||
;; By default, property value separated by commas will not be treated as
|
||||
;; page references. You can add properties to enable it.
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :property/separated-by-commas #{:alias :tags}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Properties that are ignored when parsing property values for references
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :ignored-page-references-keywords #{:author :website}
|
||||
|
||||
;; logbook configuration.
|
||||
;; :logbook/settings
|
||||
;; {:with-second-support? false ;limit logbook to minutes, seconds will be eliminated
|
||||
;; :enabled-in-all-blocks true ;display logbook in all blocks after timetracking
|
||||
;; :enabled-in-timestamped-blocks false ;don't display logbook at all
|
||||
;; }
|
||||
|
||||
;; Mobile photo upload configuration.
|
||||
;; :mobile/photo
|
||||
;; {:allow-editing? true
|
||||
;; :quality 80}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Mobile features options
|
||||
;; Gestures
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :mobile
|
||||
;; {:gestures/disabled-in-block-with-tags ["kanban"]}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Extra CodeMirror options
|
||||
;; See https://codemirror.net/5/doc/manual.html#config for possible options
|
||||
;; Example usage:
|
||||
;; :editor/extra-codemirror-options
|
||||
;; {:lineWrapping false ; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :lineNumbers true ; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :readOnly false} ; Default value: false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Enable logical outdenting
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :editor/logical-outdenting? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Prefer pasting the file when text and a file are in the clipboard.
|
||||
;; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :editor/preferred-pasting-file? false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Quick capture templates for receiving content from other apps.
|
||||
;; Each template contains three elements {time}, {text} and {url}, which can be auto-expanded
|
||||
;; by receiving content from other apps. Note: the {} cannot be omitted.
|
||||
;; - {time}: capture time
|
||||
;; - {date}: capture date using current date format, use `[[{date}]]` to get a page reference
|
||||
;; - {text}: text that users selected before sharing.
|
||||
;; - {url}: URL or assets path for media files stored in Logseq.
|
||||
;; You can also reorder them or use only one or two of them in the template.
|
||||
;; You can also insert or format any text in the template, as shown in the following examples.
|
||||
;; :quick-capture-templates
|
||||
;; {:text "[[quick capture]] **{time}**: {text} from {url}"
|
||||
;; :media "[[quick capture]] **{time}**: {url}"}
|
||||
|
||||
;; Quick capture options.
|
||||
;; - insert-today? Insert the capture at the end of today's journal page (boolean).
|
||||
;; - redirect-page? Redirect to the quick capture page after capturing (boolean).
|
||||
;; - default-page The default page to capture to if insert-today? is false (string).
|
||||
;; :quick-capture-options
|
||||
;; {:insert-today? false ;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :redirect-page? false ;; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :default-page "quick capture"} ;; Default page: "quick capture"
|
||||
|
||||
;; File sync options
|
||||
;; Ignore these files when syncing, regexp is supported.
|
||||
;; :file-sync/ignore-files []
|
||||
|
||||
;; Configure the Enter key behavior for
|
||||
;; context-aware editing with DWIM (Do What I Mean).
|
||||
;; context-aware Enter key behavior implies that pressing Enter will
|
||||
;; have different outcomes based on the context.
|
||||
;; For instance, pressing Enter within a list generates a new list item,
|
||||
;; whereas pressing Enter in a block reference opens the referenced block.
|
||||
;; :dwim/settings
|
||||
;; {:admonition&src? true ;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :markup? false ;; Default value: false
|
||||
;; :block-ref? true ;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :page-ref? true ;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :properties? true ;; Default value: true
|
||||
;; :list? false} ;; Default value: false
|
||||
|
||||
;; Configure the escaping method for special characters in page titles.
|
||||
;; Warning:
|
||||
;; This is a dangerous operation. To modify the setting,
|
||||
;; access the 'Filename format' setting and follow the instructions.
|
||||
;; Otherwise, You may need to manually rename all affected files and
|
||||
;; re-index them on all clients after synchronization.
|
||||
;; Incorrect handling may result in messy page titles.
|
||||
;; Available options:
|
||||
;; - :triple-lowbar (default)
|
||||
;; ;use triple underscore `___` for slash `/` in page title
|
||||
;; ;use Percent-encoding for other invalid characters
|
||||
:file/name-format :triple-lowbar}
|
0
logseq/custom.css
Normal file
0
logseq/custom.css
Normal file
17
pages/About.md
Normal file
17
pages/About.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
|
||||
- This document was created using the 2023-2027 General Class Question Pool 2nd Errata
|
||||
Issued April 15, 2023, downloaded from https://www.arrl.org/general-question-pool
|
||||
- This is provided for the use of Hams who use (or would like to use!) Logseq for personal knowledge management, by AF0CX.
|
||||
- conversion to Logseq markdown format was hobbled together with judicious use of `sed`and `grep`
|
||||
- Refer to the [[General Syllabus]] , which has links to Subelements, Sections and Questions.
|
||||
- Example 1: [[SUBELEMENT G1]] for a subelement
|
||||
- Example 2: [[G1A]] for a section in that subelement
|
||||
- Example 3: [[G1A01]] for a question in that section
|
||||
- It is up to the person studying to embellish and take notes based on the links.
|
||||
- for example, if you are studying and see something related to question [[G1A01]], you can simply link it or use a hashtag.
|
||||
- You can further expand your knowledge by putting double brackets around terms or concepts that you want to define, such as [[MHz]] or [[Capacitance]].
|
||||
- Hint: highlight words you want to study and then go to the linked page, and expand "unlinked references" to find questions that relate to that topic.
|
||||
- As you progress, you will have a graph of meaningful links and relations that should provide you a strong basis for expanding your knowledge beyond "just passing" and understanding the material at a deeper level.
|
||||
- Questions retain the correct answer (A-D) in the header, as well as any references to other documents.
|
||||
- When running through flash cards, try to remember what the correct answer is *before* revealing the answer.
|
||||
- Disclaimers
|
||||
- This document is provided as-is and without any kind of warranty. I have attempted to make sure that it is error-free, but mistakes can happen. Use at your own risk.
|
74
pages/G0A.md
Normal file
74
pages/G0A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G0A – RF safety principles, rules, and guidelines; routine station evaluation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G0A01]] (A)
|
||||
What is one way that RF energy can affect human body tissue? #card
|
||||
- A. It heats body tissue
|
||||
- B. It causes radiation poisoning
|
||||
- C. It causes the blood count to reach a dangerously low level
|
||||
- D. It cools body tissue
|
||||
- [[G0A02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is used to determine RF exposure from a transmitted signal? #card
|
||||
- A. Its duty cycle
|
||||
- B. Its frequency
|
||||
- C. Its power density
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A03]] (D) [97.13(c)(1)]
|
||||
How can you determine that your station complies with FCC RF exposure regulations? #card
|
||||
- A. By calculation based on FCC OET Bulletin 65
|
||||
- B. By calculation based on computer modeling
|
||||
- C. By measurement of field strength using calibrated equipment
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A04]] (D)
|
||||
What does “time averaging” mean when evaluating RF radiation exposure? #card
|
||||
- A. The average amount of power developed by the transmitter over a specific 24-hour period
|
||||
- B. The average time it takes RF radiation to have any long-term effect on the body
|
||||
- C. The total time of the exposure
|
||||
- D. The total RF exposure averaged over a certain period
|
||||
- [[G0A05]] (A) [97.13(c)(2), 1.1307(b)]
|
||||
What must you do if an evaluation of your station shows that the RF energy radiated by your station exceeds permissible limits for possible human absorption? #card
|
||||
- A. Take action to prevent human exposure to the excessive RF fields
|
||||
- B. File an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS-97) with the FCC
|
||||
- C. Secure written permission from your neighbors to operate above the controlled MPE limits
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A06]] (A) [97.13(c)(2), 1.1307(1)(b)(3)(i)]
|
||||
What must you do if your station fails to meet the FCC RF exposure exemption criteria? #card
|
||||
- A. Perform an RF Exposure Evaluation in accordance with FCC OET Bulletin 65
|
||||
- B. Contact the FCC for permission to transmit
|
||||
- C. Perform an RF exposure evaluation in accordance with World Meteorological Organization guidelines
|
||||
- D. Use an FCC-approved band-pass filter
|
||||
- [[G0A07]] (A)
|
||||
What is the effect of modulation duty cycle on RF exposure? #card
|
||||
- A. A lower duty cycle permits greater power levels to be transmitted
|
||||
- B. A higher duty cycle permits greater power levels to be transmitted
|
||||
- C. Low duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure evaluation requirements
|
||||
- D. High duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure requirements
|
||||
- [[G0A08]] (C) [97.13(c)(2)]
|
||||
Which of the following steps must an amateur operator take to ensure compliance with RF safety regulations? #card
|
||||
- A. Post a copy of FCC Part 97.13 in the station
|
||||
- B. Notify neighbors within a 100-foot radius of the antenna of the existence of the station and power levels
|
||||
- C. Perform a routine RF exposure evaluation and prevent access to any identified high exposure areas
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A09]] (B)
|
||||
What type of instrument can be used to accurately measure an RF field strength? #card
|
||||
- A. A receiver with digital signal processing (DSP) noise reduction
|
||||
- B. A calibrated field strength meter with a calibrated antenna
|
||||
- C. An SWR meter with a peak-reading function
|
||||
- D. An oscilloscope with a high-stability crystal marker generator
|
||||
- [[G0A10]] (C)
|
||||
What should be done if evaluation shows that a neighbor might experience more than the allowable limit of RF exposure from the main lobe of a directional antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Change to a non-polarized antenna with higher gain
|
||||
- B. Use an antenna with a higher front-to-back ratio
|
||||
- C. Take precautions to ensure that the antenna cannot be pointed in their direction when they are present
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0A11]] (C)
|
||||
What precaution should be taken if you install an indoor transmitting antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Locate the antenna close to your operating position to minimize feed-line radiation
|
||||
- B. Position the antenna along the edge of a wall to reduce parasitic radiation
|
||||
- C. Make sure that MPE limits are not exceeded in occupied areas
|
||||
- D. Make sure the antenna is properly shielded
|
||||
- [[G0A12]] (D) [1.1307(1)(b)(3)(i)(A)]
|
||||
What stations are subject to the FCC rules on RF exposure? #card
|
||||
- A. All commercial stations; amateur radio stations are exempt
|
||||
- B. Only stations with antennas lower than one wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- C. Only stations transmitting more than 500 watts PEP
|
||||
- D. All stations with a time-averaged transmission of more than one milliwatt
|
80
pages/G0B.md
Normal file
80
pages/G0B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
G0B – Station safety: electrical shock, grounding, fusing, interlocks, and wiring; antenna and tower safety
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G0B01]] (A)
|
||||
Which wire or wires in a four-conductor 240 VAC circuit should be attached to fuses or circuit breakers? #card
|
||||
- A. Only the hot wires
|
||||
- B. Only the neutral wire
|
||||
- C. Only the ground wire
|
||||
- D. All wires
|
||||
- [[G0B02]] (C)
|
||||
According to the National Electrical Code, what is the minimum wire size that may be used safely for wiring with a 20-ampere circuit breaker? #card
|
||||
- A. AWG number 20
|
||||
- B. AWG number 16
|
||||
- C. AWG number 12
|
||||
- D. AWG number 8
|
||||
- [[G0B03]] (D)
|
||||
Which size of fuse or circuit breaker would be appropriate to use with a circuit that uses AWG number 14 wiring? #card
|
||||
- A. 30 amperes
|
||||
- B. 25 amperes
|
||||
- C. 20 amperes
|
||||
- D. 15 amperes
|
||||
- [[G0B04]] (B)
|
||||
Where should the station’s lightning protection ground system be located? #card
|
||||
- A. As close to the station equipment as possible
|
||||
- B. Outside the building
|
||||
- C. Next to the closest power pole
|
||||
- D. Parallel to the water supply line
|
||||
- [[G0B05]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following conditions will cause a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) to disconnect AC power? #card
|
||||
- A. Current flowing from one or more of the hot wires to the neutral wire
|
||||
- B. Current flowing from one or more of the hot wires directly to ground
|
||||
- C. Overvoltage on the hot wires
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0B06]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is covered by the National Electrical Code? #card
|
||||
- A. Acceptable bandwidth limits
|
||||
- B. Acceptable modulation limits
|
||||
- C. Electrical safety of the station
|
||||
- D. RF exposure limits of the human body
|
||||
- [[G0B07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of these choices should be observed when climbing a tower using a safety harness? #card
|
||||
- A. Always hold on to the tower with one hand
|
||||
- B. Confirm that the harness is rated for the weight of the climber and that it is within its allowable service life
|
||||
- C. Ensure that all heavy tools are securely fastened to the harness
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0B08]] (B)
|
||||
What should be done before climbing a tower that supports electrically powered devices? #card
|
||||
- A. Notify the electric company that a person will be working on the tower
|
||||
- B. Make sure all circuits that supply power to the tower are locked out and tagged
|
||||
- C. Unground the base of the tower
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0B09]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is true of an emergency generator installation? #card
|
||||
- A. The generator should be operated in a well-ventilated area
|
||||
- B. The generator must be insulated from ground
|
||||
- C. Fuel should be stored near the generator for rapid refueling in case of an emergency
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G0B10]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is a danger from lead-tin solder? #card
|
||||
- A. Lead can contaminate food if hands are not washed carefully after handling the solder
|
||||
- B. High voltages can cause lead-tin solder to disintegrate suddenly
|
||||
- C. Tin in the solder can “cold flow,” causing shorts in the circuit
|
||||
- D. RF energy can convert the lead into a poisonous gas
|
||||
- [[G0B11]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is required for lightning protection ground rods? #card
|
||||
- A. They must be bonded to all buried water and gas lines
|
||||
- B. Bends in ground wires must be made as close as possible to a right angle
|
||||
- C. Lightning grounds must be connected to all ungrounded wiring
|
||||
- D. They must be bonded together with all other grounds
|
||||
- [[G0B12]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a power supply interlock? #card
|
||||
- A. To prevent unauthorized changes to the circuit that would void the manufacturer’s warranty
|
||||
- B. To shut down the unit if it becomes too hot
|
||||
- C. To ensure that dangerous voltages are removed if the cabinet is opened
|
||||
- D. To shut off the power supply if too much voltage is produced
|
||||
- [[G0B13]] (A)
|
||||
Where should lightning arrestors be located? #card
|
||||
- A. Where the feed lines enter the building
|
||||
- B. On the antenna, opposite the feed point
|
||||
- C. In series with each ground lead
|
||||
- D. At the closest power pole ground electrode
|
68
pages/G1A.md
Normal file
68
pages/G1A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G1A – General class control operator frequency privileges; primary and secondary allocations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1A01]] (C) [97.301(d)]
|
||||
On which HF and/or MF amateur bands are there portions where General class licensees cannot transmit? #card
|
||||
- A. 60 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, and 12 meters
|
||||
- B. 160 meters, 60 meters, 15 meters, and 12 meters
|
||||
- C. 80 meters, 40 meters, 20 meters, and 15 meters
|
||||
- D. 80 meters, 20 meters, 15 meters, and 10 meters
|
||||
- [[G1A02]] (B) [97.305]
|
||||
On which of the following bands is phone operation prohibited? #card
|
||||
- A. 160 meters
|
||||
- B. 30 meters
|
||||
- C. 17 meters
|
||||
- D. 12 meters
|
||||
- [[G1A03]] (B) [97.305]
|
||||
On which of the following bands is image transmission prohibited? #card
|
||||
- A. 160 meters
|
||||
- B. 30 meters
|
||||
- C. 20 meters
|
||||
- D. 12 meters
|
||||
- [[G1A04]] (D) [97.303(h)]
|
||||
Which of the following amateur bands is restricted to communication only on specific channels, rather than frequency ranges? #card
|
||||
- A. 11 meters
|
||||
- B. 12 meters
|
||||
- C. 30 meters
|
||||
- D. 60 meters
|
||||
- [[G1A05]] (A) [97.301(d)]
|
||||
On which of the following frequencies are General class licensees prohibited from operating as control operator? #card
|
||||
- A. 7.125 MHz to 7.175 MHz
|
||||
- B. 28.000 MHz to 28.025 MHz
|
||||
- C. 21.275 MHz to 21.300 MHz
|
||||
- D. All of the above
|
||||
- [[G1A06]] (C) [97.303]
|
||||
Which of the following applies when the FCC rules designate the amateur service as a secondary user on a band? #card
|
||||
- A. Amateur stations must record the call sign of the primary service station before operating on a frequency assigned to that station
|
||||
- B. Amateur stations may use the band only during emergencies
|
||||
- C. Amateur stations must not cause harmful interference to primary users and must accept interference from primary users
|
||||
- D. Amateur stations may only operate during specific hours of the day, while primary users are permitted 24-hour use of the band
|
||||
- [[G1A07]] (D) [97.305(a)]
|
||||
On which amateur frequencies in the 10-meter band may stations with a General class control operator transmit CW emissions? #card
|
||||
- A. 28.000 MHz to 28.025 MHz only
|
||||
- B. 28.000 MHz to 28.300 MHz only
|
||||
- C. 28.025 MHz to 28.300 MHz only
|
||||
- D. The entire band
|
||||
- [[G1A08]] (B) [97.301(b)]
|
||||
Which HF bands have segments exclusively allocated to Amateur Extra licensees? #card
|
||||
- A. All HF bands
|
||||
- B. 80 meters, 40 meters, 20 meters, and 15 meters
|
||||
- C. All HF bands except 160 meters and 10 meters
|
||||
- D. 60 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, and 12 meters
|
||||
- [[G1A09]] (C) [97.301(d)]
|
||||
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 15-meter band? #card
|
||||
- A. 14250 kHz
|
||||
- B. 18155 kHz
|
||||
- C. 21300 kHz
|
||||
- D. 24900 kHz
|
||||
- [[G1A10]] (D) [97.205(b)]
|
||||
What portion of the 10-meter band is available for repeater use? #card
|
||||
- A. The entire band
|
||||
- B. The portion between 28.1 MHz and 28.2 MHz
|
||||
- C. The portion between 28.3 MHz and 28.5 MHz
|
||||
- D. The portion above 29.5 MHz
|
||||
- [[G1A11]] (B) [97.301]
|
||||
When General class licensees are not permitted to use the entire voice portion of a band, which portion of the voice segment is available to them? #card
|
||||
- A. The lower frequency portion
|
||||
- B. The upper frequency portion
|
||||
- C. The lower frequency portion on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the upper portion on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
|
||||
- D. The upper frequency portion on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the lower portion on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
|
68
pages/G1B.md
Normal file
68
pages/G1B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G1B – Antenna structure limitations; good engineering and good amateur practice; beacon operation; prohibited transmissions; retransmitting radio signals
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1B01]] (C) [97.15(a)]
|
||||
What is the maximum height above ground for an antenna structure not near a public use airport without requiring notification to the FAA and registration with the FCC? #card
|
||||
- A. 50 feet
|
||||
- B. 100 feet
|
||||
- C. 200 feet
|
||||
- D. 250 feet
|
||||
- [[G1B02]] (A) [97.203(b)]
|
||||
With which of the following conditions must beacon stations comply? #card
|
||||
- A. No more than one beacon station may transmit in the same band from the same station location
|
||||
- B. The frequency must be coordinated with the National Beacon Organization
|
||||
- C. The frequency must be posted on the internet or published in a national periodical
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1B03]] (A) [97.3(a)(9)]
|
||||
Which of the following is a purpose of a beacon station as identified in the FCC rules? #card
|
||||
- A. Observation of propagation and reception
|
||||
- B. Automatic identification of repeaters
|
||||
- C. Transmission of bulletins of general interest to amateur radio licensees
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1B04]] (C) [97.113(c)]
|
||||
Which of the following transmissions is permitted for all amateur stations? #card
|
||||
- A. Unidentified transmissions of less than 10 seconds duration for test purposes only
|
||||
- B. Automatic retransmission of other amateur signals by any amateur station
|
||||
- C. Occasional retransmission of weather and propagation forecast information from US government stations
|
||||
- D. Encrypted messages, if not intended to facilitate a criminal act
|
||||
- [[G1B05]] (B) [97.111((5)(b)]
|
||||
Which of the following one-way transmissions are permitted? #card
|
||||
- A. Unidentified test transmissions of less than 10 seconds in duration
|
||||
- B. Transmissions to assist with learning the International Morse code
|
||||
- C. Regular transmissions offering equipment for sale, if intended for amateur radio use
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1B06]] (D) [97.15(b), PRB-1, 101 FCC 2d 952 (1985)]
|
||||
Under what conditions are state and local governments permitted to regulate amateur radio antenna structures? #card
|
||||
- A. Under no circumstances, FCC rules take priority
|
||||
- B. At any time and to any extent necessary to accomplish a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity, provided that proper filings are made with the FCC
|
||||
- C. Only when such structures exceed 50 feet in height and are clearly visible 1,000 feet from the structure
|
||||
- D. Amateur Service communications must be reasonably accommodated, and regulations must constitute the minimum practical to accommodate a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity
|
||||
- [[G1B07]] (B) [97.113(a)(4)]
|
||||
What are the restrictions on the use of abbreviations or procedural signals in the amateur service? #card
|
||||
- A. Only “Q” signals are permitted
|
||||
- B. They may be used if they do not obscure the meaning of a message
|
||||
- C. They are not permitted
|
||||
- D. They are limited to those expressly listed in Part 97 of the FCC rules
|
||||
- [[G1B08]] (B) [97.111(a)(1)]
|
||||
When is it permissible to communicate with amateur stations in countries outside the areas administered by the Federal Communications Commission? #card
|
||||
- A. Only when the foreign country has a formal third-party agreement filed with the FCC
|
||||
- B. When the contact is with amateurs in any country except those whose administrations have notified the ITU that they object to such communications
|
||||
- C. Only when the contact is with amateurs licensed by a country which is a member of the United Nations, or by a territory possessed by such a country
|
||||
- D. Only when the contact is with amateurs licensed by a country which is a member of the International Amateur Radio Union, or by a territory possessed by such a country
|
||||
- [[G1B09]] (D) [97.203(d)]
|
||||
On what HF frequencies are automatically controlled beacons permitted? #card
|
||||
- A. On any frequency if power is less than 1 watt
|
||||
- B. On any frequency if transmissions are in Morse code
|
||||
- C. 21.08 MHz to 21.09 MHz
|
||||
- D. 28.20 MHz to 28.30 MHz
|
||||
- [[G1B10]] (C) [97.203(c)]
|
||||
What is the power limit for beacon stations? #card
|
||||
- A. 10 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 20 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 100 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- [[G1B11]] (A) [97.101(a)]
|
||||
Who or what determines “good engineering and good amateur practice,” as applied to the operation of an amateur station in all respects not covered by the Part 97 rules? #card
|
||||
- A. The FCC
|
||||
- B. The control operator
|
||||
- C. The IEEE
|
||||
- D. The ITU
|
68
pages/G1C.md
Normal file
68
pages/G1C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G1C – Transmitter power regulations; data emission standards; 60-meter operation requirements
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1C01]] (A) [97.313(c)(1)]
|
||||
What is the maximum transmitter power an amateur station may use on 10.140 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 1000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 2000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- [[G1C02]] (C) [97.313]
|
||||
What is the maximum transmitter power an amateur station may use on the 12-meter band? #card
|
||||
- A. 50 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. An effective radiated power equivalent to 100 watts from a half-wave dipole
|
||||
- [[G1C03]] (A) [97.303(h)(1)]
|
||||
What is the maximum bandwidth permitted by FCC rules for amateur radio stations transmitting on USB frequencies in the 60-meter band? #card
|
||||
- A. 2.8 kHz
|
||||
- B. 5.6 kHz
|
||||
- C. 1.8 kHz
|
||||
- D. 3 kHz
|
||||
- [[G1C04]] (A) [97.303(i)]
|
||||
Which of the following is required by the FCC rules when operating in the 60-meter band? #card
|
||||
- A. If you are using an antenna other than a dipole, you must keep a record of the gain of your antenna
|
||||
- B. You must keep a record of the date, time, frequency, power level, and stations worked
|
||||
- C. You must keep a record of all third-party traffic
|
||||
- D. You must keep a record of the manufacturer of your equipment and the antenna used
|
||||
- [[G1C05]] (C) [97.313]
|
||||
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 28 MHz band for a General Class control operator? #card
|
||||
- A. 100 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 1000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 2000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- [[G1C06]] (D) [97.313]
|
||||
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 1.8 MHz band? #card
|
||||
- A. 200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- B. 1000 watts PEP output
|
||||
- C. 1200 watts PEP output
|
||||
- D. 1500 watts PEP output
|
||||
- [[G1C07]] (C) [97.309(a)(4)]
|
||||
What must be done before using a new digital protocol on the air?
|
||||
- A. Type-certify equipment to FCC standards
|
||||
- B. Obtain an experimental license from the FCC
|
||||
- C. Publicly document the technical characteristics of the protocol
|
||||
- D. Submit a rule-making proposal to the FCC describing the codes and methods of the technique
|
||||
- [[G1C08]] (D) [97.307(f)(3)]
|
||||
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted at frequencies below 28 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. 56 kilobaud
|
||||
- B. 19.6 kilobaud
|
||||
- C. 1200 baud
|
||||
- D. 300 baud
|
||||
- [[G1C09]] (C) [97.313(i)]
|
||||
What is the maximum power limit on the 60-meter band? #card
|
||||
- A. 1500 watts PEP
|
||||
- B. 10 watts RMS
|
||||
- C. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to a dipole
|
||||
- D. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to an isotropic antenna
|
||||
- [[G1C10]] (C) [97.305(c) and 97.307(f)(4)]
|
||||
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 10-meter band? #card
|
||||
- A. 56 kilobaud
|
||||
- B. 19.6 kilobaud
|
||||
- C. 1200 baud
|
||||
- D. 300 baud
|
||||
- [[G1C11]] (D) [97.313]
|
||||
What measurement is specified by FCC rules that regulate maximum power? #card
|
||||
- A. RMS output from the transmitter
|
||||
- B. RMS input to the antenna
|
||||
- C. PEP input to the antenna
|
||||
- D. PEP output from the transmitter
|
74
pages/G1D.md
Normal file
74
pages/G1D.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G1D – Volunteer Examiners and Volunteer Examiner Coordinators; temporary identification; element credit; remote operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1D01]] (A) [97.501, 97.505(a)]
|
||||
Who may receive partial credit for the elements represented by an expired amateur radio license? #card
|
||||
- A. Any person who can demonstrate that they once held an FCC-issued General, Advanced, or Amateur Extra class license that was not revoked by the FCC
|
||||
- B. Anyone who held an FCC-issued amateur radio license that expired not less than 5 and not more than 15 years ago
|
||||
- C. Any person who previously held an amateur license issued by another country, but only if that country has a current reciprocal licensing agreement with the FCC
|
||||
- D. Only persons who once held an FCC issued Novice, Technician, or Technician Plus license
|
||||
- [[G1D02]] (C) [97.509(b)(3)(i)]
|
||||
What license examinations may you administer as an accredited Volunteer Examiner holding a General class operator license? #card
|
||||
- A. General and Technician
|
||||
- B. None, only Amateur Extra class licensees may be accredited
|
||||
- C. Technician only
|
||||
- D. Amateur Extra, General, and Technician
|
||||
- [[G1D03]] (C) [97.9(b)]
|
||||
On which of the following band segments may you operate if you are a Technician class operator and have an unexpired Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class privileges? #card
|
||||
- A. Only the Technician band segments until your upgrade is posted in the FCC database
|
||||
- B. Only on the Technician band segments until you have a receipt for the FCC application fee payment
|
||||
- C. On any General or Technician class band segment
|
||||
- D. On any General or Technician class band segment except 30 meters and 60 meters
|
||||
- [[G1D04]] (A) [97.509(3)(i)(c)]
|
||||
Who must observe the administration of a Technician class license examination? #card
|
||||
- A. At least three Volunteer Examiners of General class or higher
|
||||
- B. At least two Volunteer Examiners of General class or higher
|
||||
- C. At least two Volunteer Examiners of Technician class or higher
|
||||
- D. At least three Volunteer Examiners of Technician class
|
||||
- [[G1D05]] (A) [97.7]
|
||||
When operating a US station by remote control from outside the country, what license is required of the control operator? #card
|
||||
- A. A US operator/primary station license
|
||||
- B. Only an appropriate US operator/primary license and a special remote station permit from the FCC
|
||||
- C. Only a license from the foreign country, as long as the call sign includes identification of portable operation in the US
|
||||
- D. A license from the foreign country and a special remote station permit from the FCC
|
||||
- [[G1D06]] (A) [97.119(f)(2)]
|
||||
Until an upgrade to General class is shown in the FCC database, when must a Technician licensee identify with “AG” after their call sign? #card
|
||||
- A. Whenever they operate using General class frequency privileges
|
||||
- B. Whenever they operate on any amateur frequency
|
||||
- C. Whenever they operate using Technician frequency privileges
|
||||
- D. A special identifier is not required if their General class license application has been filed with the FCC
|
||||
- [[G1D07]] (C) [97.509(b)(1)]
|
||||
Volunteer Examiners are accredited by what organization? #card
|
||||
- A. The Federal Communications Commission
|
||||
- B. The Universal Licensing System
|
||||
- C. A Volunteer Examiner Coordinator
|
||||
- D. The Wireless Telecommunications Bureau
|
||||
- [[G1D08]] (B) [97.509(b)(3)]
|
||||
Which of the following criteria must be met for a non-US citizen to be an accredited Volunteer Examiner? #card
|
||||
- A. The person must be a resident of the US for a minimum of 5 years
|
||||
- B. The person must hold an FCC granted amateur radio license of General class or above
|
||||
- C. The person’s home citizenship must be in ITU region 2
|
||||
- D. None of these choices is correct; a non-US citizen cannot be a Volunteer Examiner
|
||||
- [[G1D09]] (C) [97.9(b)]
|
||||
How long is a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) valid for exam element credit? #card
|
||||
- A. 30 days
|
||||
- B. 180 days
|
||||
- C. 365 days
|
||||
- D. For as long as your current license is valid
|
||||
- [[G1D10]] (B) [97.509(b)(2)]
|
||||
What is the minimum age that one must be to qualify as an accredited Volunteer Examiner? #card
|
||||
- A. 16 years
|
||||
- B. 18 years
|
||||
- C. 21 years
|
||||
- D. There is no age limit
|
||||
- [[G1D11]] (D) [97.505]
|
||||
What action is required to obtain a new General class license after a previously held license has expired and the two-year grace period has passed? #card
|
||||
- A. They must have a letter from the FCC showing they once held an amateur or commercial license
|
||||
- B. There are no requirements other than being able to show a copy of the expired license
|
||||
- C. Contact the FCC to have the license reinstated
|
||||
- D. The applicant must show proof of the appropriate expired license grant and pass the current Element 2 exam
|
||||
- [[G1D12]] (C) [97.507]
|
||||
When operating a station in South America by remote control over the internet from the US, what regulations apply? #card
|
||||
- A. Those of both the remote station’s country and the FCC
|
||||
- B. Those of the remote station’s country and the FCC’s third-party regulations
|
||||
- C. Only those of the remote station’s country
|
||||
- D. Only those of the FCC
|
74
pages/G1E.md
Normal file
74
pages/G1E.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G1E – Control categories; repeater regulations; third-party rules; ITU regions; automatically controlled digital station
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G1E01]] (A) [97.115(b)(2)]
|
||||
Which of the following would disqualify a third party from participating in sending a message via an amateur station? #card
|
||||
- A. The third party’s amateur license has been revoked and not reinstated
|
||||
- B. The third party is not a US citizen
|
||||
- C. The third party is speaking in a language other than English
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1E02]] (D) [97.205(b)]
|
||||
When may a 10-meter repeater retransmit the 2-meter signal from a station that has a Technician class control operator? #card
|
||||
- A. Under no circumstances
|
||||
- B. Only if the station on 10-meters is operating under a Special Temporary Authorization allowing such retransmission
|
||||
- C. Only during an FCC-declared general state of communications emergency
|
||||
- D. Only if the 10-meter repeater control operator holds at least a General class license
|
||||
- [[G1E03]] (A) [97.221]
|
||||
What is required to conduct communications with a digital station operating under automatic control outside the automatic control band segments? #card
|
||||
- A. The station initiating the contact must be under local or remote control
|
||||
- B. The interrogating transmission must be made by another automatically controlled station
|
||||
- C. No third-party traffic may be transmitted
|
||||
- D. The control operator of the interrogating station must hold an Amateur Extra class license
|
||||
- [[G1E04]] (D) [97.13(b), 97.303, 97.311(b)]
|
||||
Which of the following conditions require a licensed amateur radio operator to take specific steps to avoid harmful interference to other users or facilities? #card
|
||||
- A. When operating within one mile of an FCC Monitoring Station
|
||||
- B. When using a band where the Amateur Service is secondary
|
||||
- C. When a station is transmitting spread spectrum emissions
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G1E05]] (C) [97.115(a)(2), 97.117]
|
||||
What are the restrictions on messages sent to a third party in a country with which there is a Third-Party Agreement? #card
|
||||
- A. They must relate to emergencies or disaster relief
|
||||
- B. They must be for other licensed amateurs
|
||||
- C. They must relate to amateur radio, or remarks of a personal character, or messages relating to emergencies or disaster relief
|
||||
- D. The message must be limited to no longer than 1 minute in duration and the name of the third party must be recorded in the station log
|
||||
- [[G1E06]] (C) [97.301, ITU Radio Regulations]
|
||||
The frequency allocations of which ITU region apply to radio amateurs operating in North and South America? #card
|
||||
- A. Region 4
|
||||
- B. Region 3
|
||||
- C. Region 2
|
||||
- D. Region 1
|
||||
- [[G1E07]] (D) [97.111]
|
||||
In what part of the 2.4 GHz band may an amateur station communicate with non-licensed Wi-Fi stations? #card
|
||||
- A. Anywhere in the band
|
||||
- B. Channels 1 through 4
|
||||
- C. Channels 42 through 45
|
||||
- D. No part
|
||||
- [[G1E08]] (B) [97.313(j)]
|
||||
What is the maximum PEP output allowed for spread spectrum transmissions? #card
|
||||
- A. 100 milliwatts
|
||||
- B. 10 watts
|
||||
- C. 100 watts
|
||||
- D. 1500 watts
|
||||
- [[G1E09]] (A) [97.115]
|
||||
Under what circumstances are messages that are sent via digital modes exempt from Part 97 third-party rules that apply to other modes of communication? #card
|
||||
- A. Under no circumstances
|
||||
- B. When messages are encrypted
|
||||
- C. When messages are not encrypted
|
||||
- D. When under automatic control
|
||||
- [[G1E10]] (A) [97.101]
|
||||
Why should an amateur operator normally avoid transmitting on 14.100, 18.110, 21.150, 24.930 and 28.200 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. A system of propagation beacon stations operates on those frequencies
|
||||
- B. A system of automatic digital stations operates on those frequencies
|
||||
- C. These frequencies are set aside for emergency operations
|
||||
- D. These frequencies are set aside for bulletins from the FCC
|
||||
- [[G1E11]] (D) [97.221, 97.305]
|
||||
On what bands may automatically controlled stations transmitting RTTY or data emissions communicate with other automatically controlled digital stations? #card
|
||||
- A. On any band segment where digital operation is permitted
|
||||
- B. Anywhere in the non-phone segments of the 10-meter or shorter wavelength bands
|
||||
- C. Only in the non-phone Extra Class segments of the bands
|
||||
- D. Anywhere in the 6-meter or shorter wavelength bands, and in limited segments of some of the HF bands
|
||||
- [[G1E12]] (A) [97.115]
|
||||
When may third-party messages be transmitted via remote control? #card
|
||||
- A. Under any circumstances in which third party messages are permitted by FCC rules
|
||||
- B. Under no circumstances except for emergencies
|
||||
- C. Only when the message is intended for licensed radio amateurs
|
||||
- D. Only when the message is intended for third parties in areas where licensing is controlled by the FCC
|
74
pages/G2A.md
Normal file
74
pages/G2A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G2A – Phone operating procedures: USB/LSB conventions, breaking into a contact, transmitter setup for voice operation; answering DX stations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2A01]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on frequencies of 14 MHz or higher? #card
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A02]] (B)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter bands? #card
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A03]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for SSB voice communications in the VHF and UHF bands? #card
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A04]] (A)
|
||||
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 17- and 12-meter bands? #card
|
||||
- A. Upper sideband
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband
|
||||
- C. Suppressed sideband
|
||||
- D. Double sideband
|
||||
- [[G2A05]] (C)
|
||||
Which mode of voice communication is most commonly used on the HF amateur bands? #card
|
||||
- A. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- B. Double sideband
|
||||
- C. Single sideband
|
||||
- D. Single phase modulation
|
||||
- [[G2A06]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of using single sideband, as compared to other analog voice modes on the HF amateur bands? #card
|
||||
- A. Very high-fidelity voice modulation
|
||||
- B. Less subject to interference from atmospheric static crashes
|
||||
- C. Ease of tuning on receive and immunity to impulse noise
|
||||
- D. Less bandwidth used and greater power efficiency
|
||||
- [[G2A07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true of single sideband (SSB)? #card
|
||||
- A. Only one sideband and the carrier are transmitted; the other sideband is suppressed
|
||||
- B. Only one sideband is transmitted; the other sideband and carrier are suppressed
|
||||
- C. SSB is the only voice mode authorized on the 20-, 15-, and 10-meter amateur bands
|
||||
- D. SSB is the only voice mode authorized on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter amateur bands
|
||||
- [[G2A08]] (B)
|
||||
What is the recommended way to break into a phone contact? #card
|
||||
- A. Say “QRZ” several times, followed by your call sign
|
||||
- B. Say your call sign once
|
||||
- C. Say “Breaker Breaker”
|
||||
- D. Say “CQ” followed by the call sign of either station
|
||||
- [[G2A09]] (D)
|
||||
Why do most amateur stations use lower sideband on the 160-, 75-, and 40-meter bands? #card
|
||||
- A. Lower sideband is more efficient than upper sideband at these frequencies
|
||||
- B. Lower sideband is the only sideband legal on these frequency bands
|
||||
- C. Because it is fully compatible with an AM detector
|
||||
- D. It is commonly accepted amateur practice
|
||||
- [[G2A10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true of VOX operation versus PTT operation? #card
|
||||
- A. The received signal is more natural sounding
|
||||
- B. It allows “hands free” operation
|
||||
- C. It occupies less bandwidth
|
||||
- D. It provides more power output
|
||||
- [[G2A11]] (C)
|
||||
Generally, who should respond to a station in the contiguous 48 states calling “CQ DX”? #card
|
||||
- A. Any caller is welcome to respond
|
||||
- B. Only stations in Germany
|
||||
- C. Any stations outside the lower 48 states
|
||||
- D. Only contest stations
|
||||
- [[G2A12]] (B)
|
||||
What control is typically adjusted for proper ALC setting on a single sideband transceiver? #card
|
||||
- A. RF clipping level
|
||||
- B. Transmit audio or microphone gain
|
||||
- C. Antenna inductance or capacitance
|
||||
- D. Attenuator level
|
68
pages/G2B.md
Normal file
68
pages/G2B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G2B – Operating effectively; band plans; drills and emergencies; RACES operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2B01]] (C) [97.101(b), (c)]
|
||||
Which of the following is true concerning access to frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. Nets have priority
|
||||
- B. QSOs in progress have priority
|
||||
- C. Except during emergencies, no amateur station has priority access to any frequency
|
||||
- D. Contest operations should yield to non-contest use of frequencies
|
||||
- [[G2B02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the first thing you should do if you are communicating with another amateur station and hear a station in distress break in? #card
|
||||
- A. Inform your local emergency coordinator
|
||||
- B. Acknowledge the station in distress and determine what assistance may be needed
|
||||
- C. Immediately decrease power to avoid interfering with the station in distress
|
||||
- D. Immediately cease all transmissions
|
||||
- [[G2B03]] (C)
|
||||
What is good amateur practice if propagation changes during a contact creating interference from other stations using the frequency? #card
|
||||
- A. Advise the interfering stations that you are on the frequency and that you have priority
|
||||
- B. Decrease power and continue to transmit
|
||||
- C. Attempt to resolve the interference problem with the other stations in a mutually acceptable manner
|
||||
- D. Switch to the opposite sideband
|
||||
- [[G2B04]] (B)
|
||||
When selecting a CW transmitting frequency, what minimum separation from other stations should be used to minimize interference to stations on adjacent frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. 5 Hz to 50 Hz
|
||||
- B. 150 Hz to 500 Hz
|
||||
- C. 1 kHz to 3 kHz
|
||||
- D. 3 kHz to 6 kHz
|
||||
- [[G2B05]] (C)
|
||||
When selecting an SSB transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to stations on adjacent frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. 5 Hz to 50 Hz
|
||||
- B. 150 Hz to 500 Hz
|
||||
- C. 2 kHz to 3 kHz
|
||||
- D. Approximately 6 kHz
|
||||
- [[G2B06]] (A)
|
||||
How can you avoid harmful interference on an apparently clear frequency before calling CQ on CW or phone? #card
|
||||
- A. Send “QRL?” on CW, followed by your call sign; or, if using phone, ask if the frequency is in use, followed by your call sign
|
||||
- B. Listen for 2 minutes before calling CQ
|
||||
- C. Send the letter “V” in Morse code several times and listen for a response, or say “test” several times and listen for a response
|
||||
- D. Send “QSY” on CW or if using phone, announce “the frequency is in use,” then give your call sign and listen for a response
|
||||
- [[G2B07]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following complies with commonly accepted amateur practice when choosing a frequency on which to initiate a call? #card
|
||||
- A. Listen on the frequency for at least two minutes to be sure it is clear
|
||||
- B. Identify your station by transmitting your call sign at least 3 times
|
||||
- C. Follow the voluntary band plan
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2B08]] (A)
|
||||
What is the voluntary band plan restriction for US stations transmitting within the 48 contiguous states in the 50.1 MHz to 50.125 MHz band segment? #card
|
||||
- A. Only contacts with stations not within the 48 contiguous states
|
||||
- B. Only contacts with other stations within the 48 contiguous states
|
||||
- C. Only digital contacts
|
||||
- D. Only SSTV contacts
|
||||
- [[G2B09]] (A) [97.407(a)]
|
||||
Who may be the control operator of an amateur station transmitting in RACES to assist relief operations during a disaster? #card
|
||||
- A. Only a person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license
|
||||
- B. Only a RACES net control operator
|
||||
- C. A person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license or an appropriate government official
|
||||
- D. Any control operator when normal communication systems are operational
|
||||
- [[G2B10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following is good amateur practice for net management? #card
|
||||
- A. Always use multiple sets of phonetics during check-in
|
||||
- B. Have a backup frequency in case of interference or poor conditions
|
||||
- C. Transmit the full net roster at the beginning of every session
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2B11]] (C) [97.407(d)(4)]
|
||||
How often may RACES training drills and tests be routinely conducted without special authorization? #card
|
||||
- A. No more than 1 hour per month
|
||||
- B. No more than 2 hours per month
|
||||
- C. No more than 1 hour per week
|
||||
- D. No more than 2 hours per week
|
68
pages/G2C.md
Normal file
68
pages/G2C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G2C – CW operating procedures and procedural signals; Q signals; full break-in
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2C01]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following describes full break-in CW operation (QSK)? #card
|
||||
- A. Breaking stations send the Morse code prosign “BK”
|
||||
- B. Automatic keyers, instead of hand keys, are used to send Morse code
|
||||
- C. An operator must activate a manual send/receive switch before and after every transmission
|
||||
- D. Transmitting stations can receive between code characters and elements
|
||||
- [[G2C02]] (A)
|
||||
What should you do if a CW station sends “QRS?”
|
||||
- A. Send slower
|
||||
- B. Change frequency
|
||||
- C. Increase your power
|
||||
- D. Repeat everything twice
|
||||
- [[G2C03]] (C)
|
||||
What does it mean when a CW operator sends “KN” at the end of a transmission? #card
|
||||
- A. No US stations should call
|
||||
- B. Operating full break-in
|
||||
- C. Listening only for a specific station or stations
|
||||
- D. Closing station now
|
||||
- [[G2C04]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRL?” mean? #card
|
||||
- A. “Will you keep the frequency clear?”
|
||||
- B. “Are you operating full break-in?” or “Can you operate full break-in?”
|
||||
- C. “Are you listening only for a specific station?”
|
||||
- D. “Are you busy?” or “Is this frequency in use?”
|
||||
- [[G2C05]] (B)
|
||||
What is the best speed to use when answering a CQ in Morse code? #card
|
||||
- A. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no slower than the CQ
|
||||
- B. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no faster than the CQ
|
||||
- C. At the standard calling speed of 10 wpm
|
||||
- D. At the standard calling speed of 5 wpm
|
||||
- [[G2C06]] (D)
|
||||
What does the term “zero beat” mean in CW operation? #card
|
||||
- A. Matching the speed of the transmitting station
|
||||
- B. Operating split to avoid interference on frequency
|
||||
- C. Sending without error
|
||||
- D. Matching the transmit frequency to the frequency of a received signal
|
||||
- [[G2C07]] (A)
|
||||
When sending CW, what does a “C” mean when added to the RST report? #card
|
||||
- A. Chirpy or unstable signal
|
||||
- B. Report was read from an S meter rather than estimated
|
||||
- C. 100 percent copy
|
||||
- D. Key clicks
|
||||
- [[G2C08]] (C)
|
||||
What prosign is sent to indicate the end of a formal message when using CW? #card
|
||||
- A. SK
|
||||
- B. BK
|
||||
- C. AR
|
||||
- D. KN
|
||||
- [[G2C09]] (C)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QSL” mean? #card
|
||||
- A. Send slower
|
||||
- B. We have already confirmed the contact
|
||||
- C. I have received and understood
|
||||
- D. We have worked before
|
||||
- [[G2C10]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRN” mean? #card
|
||||
- A. Send more slowly
|
||||
- B. Stop sending
|
||||
- C. Zero beat my signal
|
||||
- D. I am troubled by static
|
||||
- [[G2C11]] (D)
|
||||
What does the Q signal “QRV” mean? #card
|
||||
- A. You are sending too fast
|
||||
- B. There is interference on the frequency
|
||||
- C. I am quitting for the day
|
||||
- D. I am ready to receive
|
65
pages/G2D.md
Normal file
65
pages/G2D.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
|
||||
G2D – Volunteer Monitor Program; HF operations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2D01]] (A)
|
||||
What is the Volunteer Monitor Program? #card
|
||||
- A. Amateur volunteers who are formally enlisted to monitor the airwaves for rules violations
|
||||
- B. Amateur volunteers who conduct amateur licensing examinations
|
||||
- C. Amateur volunteers who conduct frequency coordination for amateur VHF repeaters
|
||||
- D. Amateur volunteers who use their station equipment to help civil defense organizations in times of emergency
|
||||
- [[G2D02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are objectives of the Volunteer Monitor Program? #card
|
||||
- A. To conduct efficient and orderly amateur licensing examinations
|
||||
- B. To provide emergency and public safety communications
|
||||
- C. To coordinate repeaters for efficient and orderly spectrum usage
|
||||
- D. To encourage amateur radio operators to self-regulate and comply with the rules
|
||||
- [[G2D03]] (B)
|
||||
What procedure may be used by Volunteer Monitors to localize a station whose continuous carrier is holding a repeater on in their area? #card
|
||||
- A. Compare vertical and horizontal signal strengths on the input frequency
|
||||
- B. Compare beam headings on the repeater input from their home locations with that of other Volunteer Monitors
|
||||
- C. Compare signal strengths between the input and output of the repeater
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2D04]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes an azimuthal projection map? #card
|
||||
- A. A map that shows accurate land masses
|
||||
- B. A map that shows true bearings and distances from a specific location
|
||||
- C. A map that shows the angle at which an amateur satellite crosses the equator
|
||||
- D. A map that shows the number of degrees longitude that an amateur satellite appears to move westward at the equator with each orbit
|
||||
- [[G2D05]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following indicates that you are looking for an HF contact with any station? #card
|
||||
- C. Repeat “CQ” a few times, followed by “this is,” then your call sign a few times, then pause to listen, repeat as necessary
|
||||
- [[G2D06]] (C)
|
||||
How is a directional antenna pointed when making a “long-path” contact with another station? #card
|
||||
- A. Toward the rising sun
|
||||
- B. Along the gray line
|
||||
- C. 180 degrees from the station’s short-path heading
|
||||
- D. Toward the north
|
||||
- [[G2D07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are examples of the NATO Phonetic Alphabet? #card
|
||||
- A. Able, Baker, Charlie, Dog
|
||||
- B. Adam, Boy, Charles, David
|
||||
- C. America, Boston, Canada, Denmark
|
||||
- D. Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, Delta
|
||||
- [[G2D08]] (D)
|
||||
Why do many amateurs keep a station log? #card
|
||||
- A. The FCC requires a log of all international contacts
|
||||
- B. The FCC requires a log of all international third-party traffic
|
||||
- C. The log provides evidence of operation needed to renew a license without retest
|
||||
- D. To help with a reply if the FCC requests information about your station
|
||||
- [[G2D09]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is required when participating in a contest on HF frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. Submit a log to the contest sponsor
|
||||
- B. Send a QSL card to the stations worked, or QSL via Logbook of The World
|
||||
- C. Identify your station according to normal FCC regulations
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2D10]] (B)
|
||||
What is QRP operation? #card
|
||||
- A. Remote piloted model control
|
||||
- B. Low-power transmit operation
|
||||
- C. Transmission using Quick Response Protocol
|
||||
- D. Traffic relay procedure net operation
|
||||
- [[G2D11]] (A)
|
||||
Why are signal reports typically exchanged at the beginning of an HF contact? #card
|
||||
- A. To allow each station to operate according to conditions
|
||||
- B. To be sure the contact will count for award programs
|
||||
- C. To follow standard radiogram structure
|
||||
- D. To allow each station to calibrate their frequency display
|
92
pages/G2E.md
Normal file
92
pages/G2E.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
|
||||
G2E – Digital mode operating procedures
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G2E01]] (D)
|
||||
Which mode is normally used when sending RTTY signals via AFSK with an SSB transmitter? #card
|
||||
- A. USB
|
||||
- B. DSB
|
||||
- C. CW
|
||||
- D. LSB
|
||||
- [[G2E02]] (B)
|
||||
What is VARA? #card
|
||||
- A. A low signal-to-noise digital mode used for EME (moonbounce)
|
||||
- B. A digital protocol used with Winlink
|
||||
- C. A radio direction finding system used on VHF and UHF
|
||||
- D.A DX spotting system using a network of software defined radios
|
||||
- [[G2E03]] (D)
|
||||
What symptoms may result from other signals interfering with a PACTOR or VARA transmission? #card
|
||||
- A. Frequent retries or timeouts
|
||||
- B. Long pauses in message transmission
|
||||
- C. Failure to establish a connection between stations
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2E04]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is good practice when choosing a transmitting frequency to answer a station calling CQ using FT8? #card
|
||||
- A. Always call on the station’s frequency
|
||||
- B. Call on any frequency in the waterfall except the station’s frequency
|
||||
- C. Find a clear frequency during the same time slot as the calling station
|
||||
- D. Find a clear frequency during the alternate time slot to the calling station
|
||||
- [[G2E05]] (B)
|
||||
What is the standard sideband for JT65, JT9, FT4, or FT8 digital signal when using AFSK? #card
|
||||
- A. LSB
|
||||
- B. USB
|
||||
- C. DSB
|
||||
- D. SSB
|
||||
- [[G2E06]] (B)
|
||||
What is the most common frequency shift for RTTY emissions in the amateur HF bands? #card
|
||||
- A. 85 Hz
|
||||
- B. 170 Hz
|
||||
- C. 425 Hz
|
||||
- D. 850 Hz
|
||||
- [[G2E07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following is required when using FT8? #card
|
||||
- A. A special hardware modem
|
||||
- B. Computer time accurate to within approximately 1 second
|
||||
- C. Receiver attenuator set to -12 dB
|
||||
- D. A vertically polarized antenna
|
||||
- [[G2E08]] (D)
|
||||
In what segment of the 20-meter band are most digital mode operations commonly found? #card
|
||||
- A. At the bottom of the slow-scan TV segment, near 14.230 MHz
|
||||
- B. At the top of the SSB phone segment, near 14.325 MHz
|
||||
- C. In the middle of the CW segment, near 14.100 MHz
|
||||
- D. Between 14.070 MHz and 14.100 MHz
|
||||
- [[G2E09]] (C)
|
||||
How do you join a contact between two stations using the PACTOR protocol? #card
|
||||
- A. Send broadcast packets containing your call sign while in MONITOR mode
|
||||
- B. Transmit a steady carrier until the PACTOR protocol times out and disconnects
|
||||
- C. Joining an existing contact is not possible, PACTOR connections are limited to two stations
|
||||
- D. Send a NAK code
|
||||
- [[G2E10]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is a way to establish contact with a digital messaging system gateway station? #card
|
||||
- A. Send an email to the system control operator
|
||||
- B. Send QRL in Morse code
|
||||
- C. Respond when the station broadcasts its SSID
|
||||
- D. Transmit a connect message on the station’s published frequency
|
||||
- [[G2E11]] (C)
|
||||
What is the primary purpose of an Amateur Radio Emergency Data Network (AREDN) mesh network? #card
|
||||
- A. To provide FM repeater coverage in remote areas
|
||||
- B. To provide real time propagation data by monitoring amateur radio transmissions worldwide
|
||||
- C. To provide high-speed data services during an emergency or community event
|
||||
- D. To provide DX spotting reports to aid contesters and DXers
|
||||
- [[G2E12]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following describes Winlink? #card
|
||||
- A. An amateur radio wireless network to send and receive email on the internet
|
||||
- B. A form of Packet Radio
|
||||
- C. A wireless network capable of both VHF and HF band operation
|
||||
- D. All of the above
|
||||
- [[G2E13]] (B)
|
||||
What is another name for a Winlink Remote Message Server? #card
|
||||
- A. Terminal Node Controller
|
||||
- B. Gateway
|
||||
- C. RJ-45
|
||||
- D. Printer/Server
|
||||
- [[G2E14]] (D)
|
||||
What could be wrong if you cannot decode an RTTY or other FSK signal even though it is apparently tuned in properly? #card
|
||||
- A. The mark and space frequencies may be reversed
|
||||
- B. You may have selected the wrong baud rate
|
||||
- C. You may be listening on the wrong sideband
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G2E15]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is a common location for FT8? #card
|
||||
- A. Anywhere in the voice portion of the band
|
||||
- B. Anywhere in the CW portion of the band
|
||||
- C. Approximately 14.074 MHz to 14.077 MHz
|
||||
- D. Approximately 14.110 MHz to 14.113 MHz
|
86
pages/G3A.md
Normal file
86
pages/G3A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
|
||||
G3A – Sunspots and solar radiation; geomagnetic field and stability indices
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G3A01]] (A)
|
||||
How does a higher sunspot number affect HF propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. Higher sunspot numbers generally indicate a greater probability of good propagation at higher frequencies
|
||||
- B. Lower sunspot numbers generally indicate greater probability of sporadic E propagation
|
||||
- C. A zero sunspot number indicates that radio propagation is not possible on any band
|
||||
- D. A zero sunspot number indicates undisturbed conditions
|
||||
- [[G3A02]] (B)
|
||||
What effect does a sudden ionospheric disturbance have on the daytime ionospheric propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. It enhances propagation on all HF frequencies
|
||||
- B. It disrupts signals on lower frequencies more than those on higher frequencies
|
||||
- C. It disrupts communications via satellite more than direct communications
|
||||
- D. None, because only areas on the night side of the Earth are affected
|
||||
- [[G3A03]] (C)
|
||||
Approximately how long does it take the increased ultraviolet and X-ray radiation from a solar flare to affect radio propagation on Earth? #card
|
||||
- A. 28 days
|
||||
- B. 1 to 2 hours
|
||||
- C. 8 minutes
|
||||
- D. 20 to 40 hours
|
||||
- [[G3A04]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are the least reliable bands for long-distance communications during periods of low solar activity? #card
|
||||
- A. 80 meters and 160 meters
|
||||
- B. 60 meters and 40 meters
|
||||
- C. 30 meters and 20 meters
|
||||
- D. 15 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
|
||||
- [[G3A05]] (D)
|
||||
What is the solar flux index? #card
|
||||
- A. A measure of the highest frequency that is useful for ionospheric propagation between two points on Earth
|
||||
- B. A count of sunspots that is adjusted for solar emissions
|
||||
- C. Another name for the American sunspot number
|
||||
- D. A measure of solar radiation with a wavelength of 10.7 centimeters
|
||||
- [[G3A06]] (D)
|
||||
What is a geomagnetic storm? #card
|
||||
- A. A sudden drop in the solar flux index
|
||||
- B. A thunderstorm that affects radio propagation
|
||||
- C. Ripples in the geomagnetic force
|
||||
- D. A temporary disturbance in Earth’s geomagnetic field
|
||||
- [[G3A07]] (D)
|
||||
At what point in the solar cycle does the 20-meter band usually support worldwide propagation during daylight hours? #card
|
||||
- A. At the summer solstice
|
||||
- B. Only at the maximum point
|
||||
- C. Only at the minimum point
|
||||
- D. At any point
|
||||
- [[G3A08]] (D)
|
||||
How can a geomagnetic storm affect HF propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. Improve high-latitude HF propagation
|
||||
- B. Degrade ground wave propagation
|
||||
- C. Improve ground wave propagation
|
||||
- D. Degrade high-latitude HF propagation
|
||||
- [[G3A09]] (A)
|
||||
How can high geomagnetic activity benefit radio communications? #card
|
||||
- A. Creates auroras that can reflect VHF signals
|
||||
- B. Increases signal strength for HF signals passing through the polar regions
|
||||
- C. Improve HF long path propagation
|
||||
- D. Reduce long delayed echoes
|
||||
- [[G3A10]] (C)
|
||||
What causes HF propagation conditions to vary periodically in a 26- to 28-day cycle? #card
|
||||
- A. Long term oscillations in the upper atmosphere
|
||||
- B. Cyclic variation in Earth’s radiation belts
|
||||
- C. Rotation of the Sun’s surface layers around its axis
|
||||
- D. The position of the Moon in its orbit
|
||||
- [[G3A11]] (D)
|
||||
How long does it take a coronal mass ejection to affect radio propagation on Earth? #card
|
||||
- A. 28 days
|
||||
- B. 14 days
|
||||
- C. 4 to 8 minutes
|
||||
- D. 15 hours to several days
|
||||
- [[G3A12]] (B)
|
||||
What does the K-index measure? #card
|
||||
- A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the Sun
|
||||
- B. The short-term stability of Earth’s geomagnetic field
|
||||
- C. The short-term stability of the Sun’s magnetic field
|
||||
- D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
|
||||
- [[G3A13]] (C)
|
||||
What does the A-index measure? #card
|
||||
- A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the Sun
|
||||
- B. The amount of polarization of the Sun’s electric field
|
||||
- C. The long-term stability of Earth’s geomagnetic field
|
||||
- D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
|
||||
- [[G3A14]] (B)
|
||||
How is long distance radio communication usually affected by the charged particles that reach Earth from solar coronal holes? #card
|
||||
- A. HF communication is improved
|
||||
- B. HF communication is disturbed
|
||||
- C. VHF/UHF ducting is improved
|
||||
- D. VHF/UHF ducting is disturbed
|
74
pages/G3B.md
Normal file
74
pages/G3B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G3B – Maximum Usable Frequency; Lowest Usable Frequency; short path and long path propagation; determining propagation conditions; ionospheric refraction
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G3B01]] (D)
|
||||
What is a characteristic of skywave signals arriving at your location by both short-path and long-path propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. Periodic fading approximately every 10 seconds
|
||||
- B. Signal strength increased by 3 dB
|
||||
- C. The signal might be cancelled causing severe attenuation
|
||||
- D. A slightly delayed echo might be heard
|
||||
- [[G3B02]] (D)
|
||||
What factors affect the MUF? #card
|
||||
- A. Path distance and location
|
||||
- B. Time of day and season
|
||||
- C. Solar radiation and ionospheric disturbances
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G3B03]] (A)
|
||||
Which frequency will have the least attenuation for long-distance skip propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. Just below the MUF
|
||||
- B. Just above the LUF
|
||||
- C. Just below the critical frequency
|
||||
- D. Just above the critical frequency
|
||||
- [[G3B04]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is a way to determine current propagation on a desired band from your station? #card
|
||||
- A. Use a network of automated receiving stations on the internet to see where your transmissions are being received
|
||||
- B. Check the A-index
|
||||
- C. Send a series of dots and listen for echoes
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G3B05]] (A)
|
||||
How does the ionosphere affect radio waves with frequencies below the MUF and above the LUF? #card
|
||||
- A. They are refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- B. They pass through the ionosphere
|
||||
- C. They are amplified by interaction with the ionosphere
|
||||
- D. They are refracted and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
|
||||
- [[G3B06]] (C)
|
||||
What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the LUF? #card
|
||||
- A. They are refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- B. They pass through the ionosphere
|
||||
- C. They are attenuated before reaching the destination
|
||||
- D. They are refracted and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
|
||||
- [[G3B07]] (A)
|
||||
What does LUF stand for? #card
|
||||
- A. The Lowest Usable Frequency for communications between two specific points
|
||||
- B. Lowest Usable Frequency for communications to any point outside a 100-mile radius
|
||||
- C. The Lowest Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
|
||||
- D. Lowest Usable Frequency during the past 60 minutes
|
||||
- [[G3B08]] (B)
|
||||
What does MUF stand for? #card
|
||||
- A. The Minimum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
|
||||
- B. The Maximum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
|
||||
- C. The Minimum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
|
||||
- D. The Maximum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
|
||||
- [[G3B09]] (C)
|
||||
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface normally covered in one hop using the F2 region? #card
|
||||
- A. 180 miles
|
||||
- B. 1,200 miles
|
||||
- C. 2,500 miles
|
||||
- D. 12,000 miles
|
||||
- [[G3B10]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface normally covered in one hop using the E region? #card
|
||||
- A. 180 miles
|
||||
- B. 1,200 miles
|
||||
- C. 2,500 miles
|
||||
- D. 12,000 miles
|
||||
- [[G3B11]] (A)
|
||||
What happens to HF propagation when the LUF exceeds the MUF? #card
|
||||
- A. Propagation via ordinary skywave communications is not possible over that path
|
||||
- B. HF communications over the path are enhanced
|
||||
- C. Double-hop propagation along the path is more common
|
||||
- D. Propagation over the path on all HF frequencies is enhanced
|
||||
- [[G3B12]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is typical of the lower HF frequencies during the summer? #card
|
||||
- A. Poor propagation at any time of day
|
||||
- B. World-wide propagation during daylight hours
|
||||
- C. Heavy distortion on signals due to photon absorption
|
||||
- D. High levels of atmospheric noise or static
|
68
pages/G3C.md
Normal file
68
pages/G3C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G3C – Ionospheric regions; critical angle and frequency; HF scatter; near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS)
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G3C01]] (A)
|
||||
Which ionospheric region is closest to the surface of Earth? #card
|
||||
- A. The D region
|
||||
- B. The E region
|
||||
- C. The F1 region
|
||||
- D. The F2 region
|
||||
- [[G3C02]] (A)
|
||||
What is meant by the term “critical frequency” at a given incidence angle? #card
|
||||
- A. The highest frequency which is refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- B. The lowest frequency which is refracted back to Earth
|
||||
- C. The frequency at which the signal-to-noise ratio approaches unity
|
||||
- D. The frequency at which the signal-to-noise ratio is 6 dB
|
||||
- [[G3C03]] (C)
|
||||
Why is skip propagation via the F2 region longer than that via the other ionospheric regions? #card
|
||||
- A. Because it is the densest
|
||||
- B. Because of the Doppler effect
|
||||
- C. Because it is the highest
|
||||
- D. Because of temperature inversions
|
||||
- [[G3C04]] (D)
|
||||
What does the term “critical angle” mean, as applied to radio wave propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. The long path azimuth of a distant station
|
||||
- B. The short path azimuth of a distant station
|
||||
- C. The lowest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
|
||||
- D. The highest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
|
||||
- [[G3C05]] (C)
|
||||
Why is long-distance communication on the 40-, 60-, 80-, and 160-meter bands more difficult during the day? #card
|
||||
- A. The F region absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
|
||||
- B. The F region is unstable during daylight hours
|
||||
- C. The D region absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
|
||||
- D. The E region is unstable during daylight hours
|
||||
- [[G3C06]] (B)
|
||||
What is a characteristic of HF scatter? #card
|
||||
- A. Phone signals have high intelligibility
|
||||
- B. Signals have a fluttering sound
|
||||
- C. There are very large, sudden swings in signal strength
|
||||
- D. Scatter propagation occurs only at night
|
||||
- [[G3C07]] (D)
|
||||
What makes HF scatter signals often sound distorted? #card
|
||||
- A. The ionospheric region involved is unstable
|
||||
- B. Ground waves are absorbing much of the signal
|
||||
- C. The E region is not present
|
||||
- D. Energy is scattered into the skip zone through several different paths
|
||||
- [[G3C08]] (A)
|
||||
Why are HF scatter signals in the skip zone usually weak? #card
|
||||
- A. Only a small part of the signal energy is scattered into the skip zone
|
||||
- B. Signals are scattered from the magnetosphere, which is not a good reflector
|
||||
- C. Propagation is via ground waves, which absorb most of the signal energy
|
||||
- D. Propagation is via ducts in the F region, which absorb most of the energy
|
||||
- [[G3C09]] (B)
|
||||
What type of propagation allows signals to be heard in the transmitting station’s skip zone? #card
|
||||
- A. Faraday rotation
|
||||
- B. Scatter
|
||||
- C. Chordal hop
|
||||
- D. Short-path
|
||||
- [[G3C10]] (B)
|
||||
What is near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS) propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. Propagation near the MUF
|
||||
- B. Short distance MF or HF propagation at high elevation angles
|
||||
- C. Long path HF propagation at sunrise and sunset
|
||||
- D. Double hop propagation near the LUF
|
||||
- [[G3C11]] (D)
|
||||
Which ionospheric region is the most absorbent of signals below 10 MHz during daylight hours? #card
|
||||
- A. The F2 region
|
||||
- B. The F1 region
|
||||
- C. The E region
|
||||
- D. The D region
|
79
pages/G4A.md
Normal file
79
pages/G4A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
|
||||
G4A – Station configuration and operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4A01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the purpose of the notch filter found on many HF transceivers? #card
|
||||
- A. To restrict the transmitter voice bandwidth
|
||||
- B. To reduce interference from carriers in the receiver passband
|
||||
- C. To eliminate receiver interference from impulse noise sources
|
||||
- D. To remove interfering splatter generated by signals on adjacent frequencies
|
||||
- [[G4A02]] (C)
|
||||
What is the benefit of using the opposite or “reverse” sideband when receiving CW? #card
|
||||
- A. Interference from impulse noise will be eliminated
|
||||
- B. More stations can be accommodated within a given signal passband
|
||||
- C. It may be possible to reduce or eliminate interference from other signals
|
||||
- D. Accidental out-of-band operation can be prevented
|
||||
- [[G4A03]] (C)
|
||||
How does a noise blanker work? #card
|
||||
- A. By temporarily increasing received bandwidth
|
||||
- B. By redirecting noise pulses into a filter capacitor
|
||||
- C. By reducing receiver gain during a noise pulse
|
||||
- D. By clipping noise peaks
|
||||
- [[G4A04]] (B)
|
||||
What is the effect on plate current of the correct setting of a vacuum-tube RF power amplifier’s TUNE control? #card
|
||||
- A. A pronounced peak
|
||||
- B. A pronounced dip
|
||||
- C. No change will be observed
|
||||
- D. A slow, rhythmic oscillation
|
||||
- [[G4A05]] (C)
|
||||
Why is automatic level control (ALC) used with an RF power amplifier? #card
|
||||
- A. To balance the transmitter audio frequency response
|
||||
- B. To reduce harmonic radiation
|
||||
- C. To prevent excessive drive
|
||||
- D. To increase overall efficiency
|
||||
- [[G4A06]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of an antenna tuner? #card
|
||||
- A. Reduce the SWR in the feed line to the antenna
|
||||
- B. Reduce the power dissipation in the feedline to the antenna
|
||||
- C. Increase power transfer from the transmitter to the feed line
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4A07]] (A)
|
||||
What happens as a receiver’s noise reduction control level is increased? #card
|
||||
- A. Received signals may become distorted
|
||||
- B. Received frequency may become unstable
|
||||
- C. CW signals may become severely attenuated
|
||||
- D. Received frequency may shift several kHz
|
||||
- [[G4A08]] (D)
|
||||
What is the correct adjustment for the LOAD or COUPLING control of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier? #card
|
||||
- A. Minimum SWR on the antenna
|
||||
- B. Minimum plate current without exceeding maximum allowable grid current
|
||||
- C. Highest plate voltage while minimizing grid current
|
||||
- D. Desired power output without exceeding maximum allowable plate current
|
||||
- [[G4A09]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of delaying RF output after activating a transmitter’s keying line to an external amplifier? #card
|
||||
- A. To prevent key clicks on CW
|
||||
- B. To prevent transient overmodulation
|
||||
- C. To allow time for the amplifier to switch the antenna between the transceiver and the amplifier output
|
||||
- D. To allow time for the amplifier power supply to reach operating level
|
||||
- [[G4A10]] (B)
|
||||
What is the function of an electronic keyer? #card
|
||||
- A. Automatic transmit/receive switching
|
||||
- B. Automatic generation of dots and dashes for CW operation
|
||||
- C. To allow time for switching the antenna from the receiver to the transmitter
|
||||
- D. Computer interface for PSK and RTTY operation
|
||||
- [[G4A11]] (B)
|
||||
Why should the ALC system be inactive when transmitting AFSK data signals? #card
|
||||
- A. ALC will invert the modulation of the AFSK mode
|
||||
- B. The ALC action distorts the signal
|
||||
- C. When using digital modes, too much ALC activity can cause the transmitter to overheat
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4A12]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is a common use of the dual-VFO feature on a transceiver? #card
|
||||
- A. To allow transmitting on two frequencies at once
|
||||
- C. To transmit on one frequency and listen on another
|
||||
- D. To improve frequency accuracy by allowing variable frequency output (VFO) operation
|
||||
- [[G4A13]] (A)
|
||||
What is the purpose of using a receive attenuator? #card
|
||||
- A. To prevent receiver overload from strong incoming signals
|
||||
- B. To reduce the transmitter power when driving a linear amplifier
|
||||
- C. To reduce power consumption when operating from batteries
|
||||
- D. To reduce excessive audio level on strong signals
|
80
pages/G4B.md
Normal file
80
pages/G4B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
G4B – Tests and test equipment
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4B01]] (D)
|
||||
What item of test equipment contains horizontal and vertical channel amplifiers? #card
|
||||
- A. An ohmmeter
|
||||
- B. A signal generator
|
||||
- C. An ammeter
|
||||
- D. An oscilloscope
|
||||
- [[G4B02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of an oscilloscope versus a digital voltmeter? #card
|
||||
- A. An oscilloscope uses less power
|
||||
- B. Complex impedances can be easily measured
|
||||
- C. Greater precision
|
||||
- D. Complex waveforms can be measured
|
||||
- [[G4B03]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is the best instrument to use for checking the keying waveform of a CW transmitter? #card
|
||||
- A. An oscilloscope
|
||||
- B. A field strength meter
|
||||
- C. A sidetone monitor
|
||||
- D. A wavemeter
|
||||
- [[G4B04]] (D)
|
||||
What signal source is connected to the vertical input of an oscilloscope when checking the RF envelope pattern of a transmitted signal? #card
|
||||
- A. The local oscillator of the transmitter
|
||||
- B. An external RF oscillator
|
||||
- C. The transmitter balanced mixer output
|
||||
- D. The attenuated RF output of the transmitter
|
||||
- [[G4B05]] (D)
|
||||
Why do voltmeters have high input impedance? #card
|
||||
- A. It improves the frequency response
|
||||
- B. It allows for higher voltages to be safely measured
|
||||
- C. It improves the resolution of the readings
|
||||
- D. It decreases the loading on circuits being measured
|
||||
- [[G4B06]] (C)
|
||||
What is an advantage of a digital multimeter as compared to an analog multimeter? #card
|
||||
- A. Better for measuring computer circuits
|
||||
- B. Less prone to overload
|
||||
- C. Higher precision
|
||||
- D. Faster response
|
||||
- [[G4B07]] (B)
|
||||
What signals are used to conduct a two-tone test? #card
|
||||
- A. Two audio signals of the same frequency shifted 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. Two non-harmonically related audio signals
|
||||
- C. Two swept frequency tones
|
||||
- D. Two audio frequency range square wave signals of equal amplitude
|
||||
- [[G4B08]] (A)
|
||||
What transmitter performance parameter does a two-tone test analyze? #card
|
||||
- A. Linearity
|
||||
- B. Percentage of suppression of the carrier and undesired sideband for SSB
|
||||
- C. Percentage of frequency modulation
|
||||
- D. Percentage of carrier phase shift
|
||||
- [[G4B09]] (D)
|
||||
When is an analog multimeter preferred to a digital multimeter? #card
|
||||
- A. When testing logic circuits
|
||||
- B. When high precision is desired
|
||||
- C. When measuring the frequency of an oscillator
|
||||
- D. When adjusting circuits for maximum or minimum values
|
||||
- [[G4B10]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following can be determined with a directional wattmeter? #card
|
||||
- A. Standing wave ratio
|
||||
- B. Antenna front-to-back ratio
|
||||
- C. RF interference
|
||||
- D. Radio wave propagation
|
||||
- [[G4B11]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following must be connected to an antenna analyzer when it is being used for SWR measurements? #card
|
||||
- A. Receiver
|
||||
- B. Transmitter
|
||||
- C. Antenna and feed line
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4B12]] (B)
|
||||
What effect can strong signals from nearby transmitters have on an antenna analyzer? #card
|
||||
- A. Desensitization which can cause intermodulation products which interfere with impedance readings
|
||||
- B. Received power that interferes with SWR readings
|
||||
- C. Generation of harmonics which interfere with frequency readings
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4B13]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following can be measured with an antenna analyzer? #card
|
||||
- A. Front-to-back ratio of an antenna
|
||||
- B. Power output from a transmitter
|
||||
- C. Impedance of coaxial cable
|
||||
- D. Gain of a directional antenna
|
74
pages/G4C.md
Normal file
74
pages/G4C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G4C – Interference to consumer electronics; grounding and bonding
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4C01]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following might be useful in reducing RF interference to audio frequency circuits? #card
|
||||
- A. Bypass inductor
|
||||
- B. Bypass capacitor
|
||||
- C. Forward-biased diode
|
||||
- D. Reverse-biased diode
|
||||
- [[G4C02]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following could be a cause of interference covering a wide range of frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. Not using a balun or line isolator to feed balanced antennas
|
||||
- B. Lack of rectification of the transmitter’s signal in power conductors
|
||||
- C. Arcing at a poor electrical connection
|
||||
- D. Using a balun to feed an unbalanced antenna
|
||||
- [[G4C03]] (C)
|
||||
What sound is heard from an audio device experiencing RF interference from a single sideband phone transmitter? #card
|
||||
- A. A steady hum whenever the transmitter is on the air
|
||||
- B. On-and-off humming or clicking
|
||||
- C. Distorted speech
|
||||
- D. Clearly audible speech
|
||||
- [[G4C04]] (A)
|
||||
What sound is heard from an audio device experiencing RF interference from a CW transmitter? #card
|
||||
- A. On-and-off humming or clicking
|
||||
- B. A CW signal at a nearly pure audio frequency
|
||||
- C. A chirpy CW signal
|
||||
- D. Severely distorted audio
|
||||
- [[G4C05]] (D)
|
||||
What is a possible cause of high voltages that produce RF burns? #card
|
||||
- A. Flat braid rather than round wire has been used for the ground wire
|
||||
- B. Insulated wire has been used for the ground wire
|
||||
- C. The ground rod is resonant
|
||||
- D. The ground wire has high impedance on that frequency
|
||||
- [[G4C06]] (C)
|
||||
What is a possible effect of a resonant ground connection? #card
|
||||
- A. Overheating of ground straps
|
||||
- B. Corrosion of the ground rod
|
||||
- C. High RF voltages on the enclosures of station equipment
|
||||
- D. A ground loop
|
||||
- [[G4C07]] (A)
|
||||
Why should soldered joints not be used in lightning protection ground connections? #card
|
||||
- A. A soldered joint will likely be destroyed by the heat of a lightning strike
|
||||
- B. Solder flux will prevent a low conductivity connection
|
||||
- C. Solder has too high a dielectric constant to provide adequate lightning protection
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4C08]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following would reduce RF interference caused by common-mode current on an audio cable? #card
|
||||
- A. Place a ferrite choke on the cable
|
||||
- B. Connect the center conductor to the shield of all cables to short circuit the RFI signal
|
||||
- C. Ground the center conductor of the audio cable causing the interference
|
||||
- D. Add an additional insulating jacket to the cable
|
||||
- [[G4C09]] (D)
|
||||
How can the effects of ground loops be minimized? #card
|
||||
- A. Connect all ground conductors in series
|
||||
- B. Connect the AC neutral conductor to the ground wire
|
||||
- C. Avoid using lock washers and star washers when making ground connections
|
||||
- D. Bond equipment enclosures together
|
||||
- [[G4C10]] (A)
|
||||
What could be a symptom caused by a ground loop in your station’s audio connections? #card
|
||||
- A. You receive reports of “hum” on your station’s transmitted signal
|
||||
- B. The SWR reading for one or more antennas is suddenly very high
|
||||
- C. An item of station equipment starts to draw excessive amounts of current
|
||||
- D. You receive reports of harmonic interference from your station
|
||||
- [[G4C11]] (C)
|
||||
What technique helps to minimize RF “hot spots” in an amateur station? #card
|
||||
- A. Building all equipment in a metal enclosure
|
||||
- B. Using surge suppressor power outlets
|
||||
- C. Bonding all equipment enclosures together
|
||||
- D. Placing low-pass filters on all feed lines
|
||||
- [[G4C12]] (D)
|
||||
Why must all metal enclosures of station equipment be grounded? #card
|
||||
- A. It prevents a blown fuse in the event of an internal short circuit
|
||||
- B. It prevents signal overload
|
||||
- C. It ensures that the neutral wire is grounded
|
||||
- D. It ensures that hazardous voltages cannot appear on the chassis
|
68
pages/G4D.md
Normal file
68
pages/G4D.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G4D – Speech processors; S meters; sideband operation near band edges
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4D01]] (A)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a speech processor in a transceiver? #card
|
||||
- A. Increase the apparent loudness of transmitted voice signals
|
||||
- B. Increase transmitter bass response for more natural-sounding SSB signals
|
||||
- C. Prevent distortion of voice signals
|
||||
- D. Decrease high-frequency voice output to prevent out-of-band operation
|
||||
- [[G4D02]] (B)
|
||||
How does a speech processor affect a single sideband phone signal? #card
|
||||
- A. It increases peak power
|
||||
- B. It increases average power
|
||||
- C. It reduces harmonic distortion
|
||||
- D. It reduces intermodulation distortion
|
||||
- [[G4D03]] (D)
|
||||
What is the effect of an incorrectly adjusted speech processor? #card
|
||||
- A. Distorted speech
|
||||
- B. Excess intermodulation products
|
||||
- C. Excessive background noise
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4D04]] (C)
|
||||
What does an S meter measure? #card
|
||||
- A. Carrier suppression
|
||||
- B. Impedance
|
||||
- C. Received signal strength
|
||||
- D. Transmitter power output
|
||||
- [[G4D05]] (D)
|
||||
How does a signal that reads 20 dB over S9 compare to one that reads S9 on a receiver, assuming a properly calibrated S meter? #card
|
||||
- A. It is 10 times less powerful
|
||||
- B. It is 20 times less powerful
|
||||
- C. It is 20 times more powerful
|
||||
- D. It is 100 times more powerful
|
||||
- [[G4D06]] (A)
|
||||
How much change in signal strength is typically represented by one S unit? #card
|
||||
- A. 6 dB
|
||||
- B. 12 dB
|
||||
- C. 15 dB
|
||||
- D. 18 dB
|
||||
- [[G4D07]] (C)
|
||||
How much must the power output of a transmitter be raised to change the S meter reading on a distant receiver from S8 to S9? #card
|
||||
- A. Approximately 1.5 times
|
||||
- B. Approximately 2 times
|
||||
- C. Approximately 4 times
|
||||
- D. Approximately 8 times
|
||||
- [[G4D08]] (C)
|
||||
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz LSB signal when the displayed carrier frequency is set to 7.178 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. 7.178 MHz to 7.181 MHz
|
||||
- B. 7.178 MHz to 7.184 MHz
|
||||
- C. 7.175 MHz to 7.178 MHz
|
||||
- D. 7.1765 MHz to 7.1795 MHz
|
||||
- [[G4D09]] (B)
|
||||
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz USB signal with the displayed carrier frequency set to 14.347 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. 14.347 MHz to 14.647 MHz
|
||||
- B. 14.347 MHz to 14.350 MHz
|
||||
- C. 14.344 MHz to 14.347 MHz
|
||||
- D. 14.3455 MHz to 14.3485 MHz
|
||||
- [[G4D10]] (A)
|
||||
How close to the lower edge of a band’s phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide LSB? #card
|
||||
- A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the segment
|
||||
- B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the segment
|
||||
- C. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
|
||||
- D. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
|
||||
- [[G4D11]] (B)
|
||||
How close to the upper edge of a band’s phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide USB? #card
|
||||
- A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the band
|
||||
- B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the band
|
||||
- C. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
|
||||
- D. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
|
68
pages/G4E.md
Normal file
68
pages/G4E.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G4E – Mobile and portable HF stations; alternative energy source operation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G4E01]] (C)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a capacitance hat on a mobile antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. To increase the power handling capacity of a whip antenna
|
||||
- B. To reduce radiation resistance
|
||||
- C. To electrically lengthen a physically short antenna
|
||||
- D. To lower the radiation angle
|
||||
- [[G4E02]] (D)
|
||||
What is the purpose of a corona ball on an HF mobile antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. To narrow the operating bandwidth of the antenna
|
||||
- B. To increase the “Q” of the antenna
|
||||
- C. To reduce the chance of damage if the antenna should strike an object
|
||||
- D. To reduce RF voltage discharge from the tip of the antenna while transmitting
|
||||
- [[G4E03]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following direct, fused power connections would be the best for a 100-watt HF mobile installation? #card
|
||||
- A. To the battery using heavy-gauge wire
|
||||
- B. To the alternator or generator using heavy-gauge wire
|
||||
- C. To the battery using insulated heavy duty balanced transmission line
|
||||
- D. To the alternator or generator using insulated heavy duty balanced transmission line
|
||||
- [[G4E04]] (B)
|
||||
Why should DC power for a 100-watt HF transceiver not be supplied by a vehicle’s auxiliary power socket? #card
|
||||
- A. The socket is not wired with an RF-shielded power cable
|
||||
- B. The socket’s wiring may be inadequate for the current drawn by the transceiver
|
||||
- C. The DC polarity of the socket is reversed from the polarity of modern HF transceivers
|
||||
- D. Drawing more than 50 watts from this socket could cause the engine to overheat
|
||||
- [[G4E05]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following most limits an HF mobile installation? #card
|
||||
- A. “Picket fencing”
|
||||
- B. The wire gauge of the DC power line to the transceiver
|
||||
- C. Efficiency of the electrically short antenna
|
||||
- D. FCC rules limiting mobile output power on the 75-meter band
|
||||
- [[G4E06]] (C)
|
||||
What is one disadvantage of using a shortened mobile antenna as opposed to a full-size antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Short antennas are more likely to cause distortion of transmitted signals
|
||||
- B. Q of the antenna will be very low
|
||||
- C. Operating bandwidth may be very limited
|
||||
- D. Harmonic radiation may increase
|
||||
- [[G4E07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following may cause receive interference to an HF transceiver installed in a vehicle? #card
|
||||
- A. The battery charging system
|
||||
- B. The fuel delivery system
|
||||
- C. The control computers
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G4E08]] (A)
|
||||
In what configuration are the individual cells in a solar panel connected together? #card
|
||||
- A. Series-parallel
|
||||
- B. Shunt
|
||||
- C. Bypass
|
||||
- D. Full-wave bridge
|
||||
- [[G4E09]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate open-circuit voltage from a fully illuminated silicon photovoltaic cell? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.02 VDC
|
||||
- B. 0.5 VDC
|
||||
- C. 0.2 VDC
|
||||
- D. 1.38 VDC
|
||||
- [[G4E10]] (B)
|
||||
Why should a series diode be connected between a solar panel and a storage battery that is being charged by the panel? #card
|
||||
- A. To prevent overload by regulating the charging voltage
|
||||
- B. To prevent discharge of the battery through the panel during times of low or no illumination
|
||||
- C. To limit the current flowing from the panel to a safe value
|
||||
- D. To prevent damage to the battery due to excessive voltage at high illumination levels
|
||||
- [[G4E11]] (D)
|
||||
What precaution should be taken when connecting a solar panel to a lithium iron phosphate battery? #card
|
||||
- A. Ground the solar panel outer metal framework
|
||||
- B. Ensure the battery is placed terminals-up
|
||||
- C. A series resistor must be in place
|
||||
- D. The solar panel must have a charge controller
|
74
pages/G5A.md
Normal file
74
pages/G5A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G5A – Reactance; inductance; capacitance; impedance; impedance transformation; resonance
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G5A01]] (C)
|
||||
What happens when inductive and capacitive reactance are equal in a series LC circuit? #card
|
||||
- A. Resonance causes impedance to be very high
|
||||
- B. Impedance is equal to the geometric mean of the inductance and capacitance
|
||||
- C. Resonance causes impedance to be very low
|
||||
- D. Impedance is equal to the arithmetic mean of the inductance and capacitance
|
||||
- [[G5A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is reactance? #card
|
||||
- A. Opposition to the flow of direct current caused by resistance
|
||||
- B. Opposition to the flow of alternating current caused by capacitance or inductance
|
||||
- C. Reinforcement of the flow of direct current caused by resistance
|
||||
- D. Reinforcement of the flow of alternating current caused by capacitance or inductance
|
||||
- [[G5A03]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is opposition to the flow of alternating current in an inductor? #card
|
||||
- A. Conductance
|
||||
- B. Reluctance
|
||||
- C. Admittance
|
||||
- D. Reactance
|
||||
- [[G5A04]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is opposition to the flow of alternating current in a capacitor? #card
|
||||
- A. Conductance
|
||||
- B. Reluctance
|
||||
- C. Reactance
|
||||
- D. Admittance
|
||||
- [[G5A05]] (D)
|
||||
How does an inductor react to AC? #card
|
||||
- A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
- B. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
- C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
- D. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
- [[G5A06]] (A)
|
||||
How does a capacitor react to AC? #card
|
||||
- A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
- B. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
- C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
|
||||
- D. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
|
||||
- [[G5A07]] (D)
|
||||
What is the term for the inverse of impedance? #card
|
||||
- A. Conductance
|
||||
- B. Susceptance
|
||||
- C. Reluctance
|
||||
- D. Admittance
|
||||
- [[G5A08]] (C)
|
||||
What is impedance? #card
|
||||
- A. The ratio of current to voltage
|
||||
- B. The product of current and voltage
|
||||
- C. The ratio of voltage to current
|
||||
- D. The product of current and reactance
|
||||
- [[G5A09]] (B)
|
||||
What unit is used to measure reactance? #card
|
||||
- A. Farad
|
||||
- B. Ohm
|
||||
- C. Ampere
|
||||
- D. Siemens
|
||||
- [[G5A10]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following devices can be used for impedance matching at radio frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. A transformer
|
||||
- B. A Pi-network
|
||||
- C. A length of transmission line
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G5A11]] (B)
|
||||
What letter is used to represent reactance? #card
|
||||
- A. Z
|
||||
- B. X
|
||||
- C. B
|
||||
- D. Y
|
||||
- [[G5A12]] (D)
|
||||
What occurs in an LC circuit at resonance?
|
||||
- A. Current and voltage are equal
|
||||
- B. Resistance is cancelled
|
||||
- C. The circuit radiates all its energy in the form of radio waves
|
||||
- D. Inductive reactance and capacitive reactance cancel
|
86
pages/G5B.md
Normal file
86
pages/G5B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
|
||||
G5B – The decibel; current and voltage dividers; electrical power calculations; sine wave root-mean-square (RMS) values; PEP calculations
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G5B01]] (B)
|
||||
What dB change represents a factor of two increase or decrease in power? #card
|
||||
- A. Approximately 2 dB
|
||||
- B. Approximately 3 dB
|
||||
- C. Approximately 6 dB
|
||||
- D. Approximately 9 dB
|
||||
- [[G5B02]] (C)
|
||||
How does the total current relate to the individual currents in a circuit of parallel resistors? #card
|
||||
- A. It equals the average of the branch currents
|
||||
- B. It decreases as more parallel branches are added to the circuit
|
||||
- C. It equals the sum of the currents through each branch
|
||||
- D. It is the sum of the reciprocal of each individual voltage drop
|
||||
- [[G5B03]] (B)
|
||||
How many watts of electrical power are consumed if 400 VDC is supplied to an 800-ohm load? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.5 watts
|
||||
- B. 200 watts
|
||||
- C. 400 watts
|
||||
- D. 3200 watts
|
||||
- [[G5B04]] (A)
|
||||
How many watts of electrical power are consumed by a 12 VDC light bulb that draws 0.2 amperes? #card
|
||||
- A. 2.4 watts
|
||||
- B. 24 watts
|
||||
- C. 6 watts
|
||||
- D. 60 watts
|
||||
- [[G5B05]] (A)
|
||||
How many watts are consumed when a current of 7.0 milliamperes flows through a 1,250-ohm resistance? #card
|
||||
- A. Approximately 61 milliwatts
|
||||
- B. Approximately 61 watts
|
||||
- C. Approximately 11 milliwatts
|
||||
- D. Approximately 11 watts
|
||||
- [[G5B06]] (B)
|
||||
What is the PEP produced by 200 volts peak-to-peak across a 50-ohm dummy load? #card
|
||||
- A. 1.4 watts
|
||||
- B. 100 watts
|
||||
- C. 353.5 watts
|
||||
- D. 400 watts
|
||||
- [[G5B07]] (C)
|
||||
What value of an AC signal produces the same power dissipation in a resistor as a DC voltage of the same value? #card
|
||||
- A. The peak-to-peak value
|
||||
- B. The peak value
|
||||
- C. The RMS value
|
||||
- D. The reciprocal of the RMS value
|
||||
- [[G5B08]] (D)
|
||||
What is the peak-to-peak voltage of a sine wave with an RMS voltage of 120 volts? #card
|
||||
- A. 84.8 volts
|
||||
- B. 169.7 volts
|
||||
- C. 240.0 volts
|
||||
- D. 339.4 volts
|
||||
- [[G5B09]] (B)
|
||||
What is the RMS voltage of a sine wave with a value of 17 volts peak? #card
|
||||
- A. 8.5 volts
|
||||
- B. 12 volts
|
||||
- C. 24 volts
|
||||
- D. 34 volts
|
||||
- [[G5B10]] (C)
|
||||
What percentage of power loss is equivalent to a loss of 1 dB? #card
|
||||
- A. 10.9 percent
|
||||
- B. 12.2 percent
|
||||
- C. 20.6 percent
|
||||
- D. 25.9 percent
|
||||
- [[G5B11]] (B)
|
||||
What is the ratio of PEP to average power for an unmodulated carrier? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.707
|
||||
- B. 1.00
|
||||
- C. 1.414
|
||||
- D. 2.00
|
||||
- [[G5B12]] (B)
|
||||
What is the RMS voltage across a 50-ohm dummy load dissipating 1200 watts? #card
|
||||
- A. 173 volts
|
||||
- B. 245 volts
|
||||
- C. 346 volts
|
||||
- D. 692 volts
|
||||
- [[G5B13]] (B)
|
||||
What is the output PEP of an unmodulated carrier if the average power is 1060 watts? #card
|
||||
- A. 530 watts
|
||||
- B. 1060 watts
|
||||
- C. 1500 watts
|
||||
- D. 2120 watts
|
||||
- [[G5B14]] (B)
|
||||
What is the output PEP of 500 volts peak-to-peak across a 50-ohm load? #card
|
||||
- A. 8.75 watts
|
||||
- B. 625 watts
|
||||
- C. 2500 watts
|
||||
- D. 5000 watts
|
86
pages/G5C.md
Normal file
86
pages/G5C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
|
||||
G5C – Resistors, capacitors, and inductors in series and parallel; transformers
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G5C01]] (C)
|
||||
What causes a voltage to appear across the secondary winding of a transformer when an AC voltage source is connected across its primary winding? #card
|
||||
- A. Capacitive coupling
|
||||
- B. Displacement current coupling
|
||||
- C. Mutual inductance
|
||||
- D. Mutual capacitance
|
||||
- [[G5C02]] (A)
|
||||
What is the output voltage if an input signal is applied to the secondary winding of a 4:1 voltage step-down transformer instead of the primary winding? #card
|
||||
- A. The input voltage is multiplied by 4
|
||||
- B. The input voltage is divided by 4
|
||||
- C. Additional resistance must be added in series with the primary to prevent overload
|
||||
- D. Additional resistance must be added in parallel with the secondary to prevent overload
|
||||
- [[G5C03]] (A)
|
||||
What is the total resistance of a 10-, a 20-, and a 50-ohm resistor connected in parallel? #card
|
||||
- A. 5.9 ohms
|
||||
- B. 0.17 ohms
|
||||
- C. 17 ohms
|
||||
- D. 80 ohms
|
||||
- [[G5C04]] (D)
|
||||
What is the approximate total resistance of a 100- and a 200-ohm resistor in parallel? #card
|
||||
- A. 300 ohms
|
||||
- B. 150 ohms
|
||||
- C. 75 ohms
|
||||
- D. 67 ohms
|
||||
- [[G5C05]] (B)
|
||||
Why is the primary winding wire of a voltage step-up transformer usually a larger size than that of the secondary winding? #card
|
||||
- A. To improve the coupling between the primary and secondary
|
||||
- B. To accommodate the higher current of the primary
|
||||
- C. To prevent parasitic oscillations due to resistive losses in the primary
|
||||
- D. To ensure that the volume of the primary winding is equal to the volume of the secondary winding
|
||||
- [[G5C06]] (A)
|
||||
What is the voltage output of a transformer with a 500-turn primary and a 1500-turn secondary when 120 VAC is applied to the primary? #card
|
||||
- A. 360 volts
|
||||
- B. 120 volts
|
||||
- C. 40 volts
|
||||
- D. 25.5 volts
|
||||
- [[G5C07]] (A)
|
||||
What transformer turns ratio matches an antenna’s 600-ohm feed point impedance to a 50-ohm coaxial cable? #card
|
||||
- A. 3.5 to 1
|
||||
- B. 12 to 1
|
||||
- C. 24 to 1
|
||||
- D. 144 to 1
|
||||
- [[G5C08]] (D)
|
||||
What is the equivalent capacitance of two 5.0-nanofarad capacitors and one 750-picofarad capacitor connected in parallel? #card
|
||||
- A. 576.9 nanofarads
|
||||
- B. 1,733 picofarads
|
||||
- C. 3,583 picofarads
|
||||
- D. 10.750 nanofarads
|
||||
- [[G5C09]] (C)
|
||||
What is the capacitance of three 100-microfarad capacitors connected in series? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.33 microfarads
|
||||
- B. 3.0 microfarads
|
||||
- C. 33.3 microfarads
|
||||
- D. 300 microfarads
|
||||
- [[G5C10]] (C)
|
||||
What is the inductance of three 10-millihenry inductors connected in parallel? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.30 henries
|
||||
- B. 3.3 henries
|
||||
- C. 3.3 millihenries
|
||||
- D. 30 millihenries
|
||||
- [[G5C11]] (C)
|
||||
What is the inductance of a circuit with a 20-millihenry inductor connected in series with a 50-millihenry inductor? #card
|
||||
- A. 7 millihenries
|
||||
- B. 14.3 millihenries
|
||||
- C. 70 millihenries
|
||||
- D. 1,000 millihenries
|
||||
- [[G5C12]] (B)
|
||||
What is the capacitance of a 20-microfarad capacitor connected in series with a 50-microfarad capacitor? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.07 microfarads
|
||||
- B. 14.3 microfarads
|
||||
- C. 70 microfarads
|
||||
- D. 1,000 microfarads
|
||||
- [[G5C13]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following components should be added to a capacitor to increase the capacitance? #card
|
||||
- A. An inductor in series
|
||||
- B. An inductor in parallel
|
||||
- C. A capacitor in parallel
|
||||
- D. A capacitor in series
|
||||
- [[G5C14]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following components should be added to an inductor to increase the inductance? #card
|
||||
- A. A capacitor in series
|
||||
- B. A capacitor in parallel
|
||||
- C. An inductor in parallel
|
||||
- D. An inductor in series
|
74
pages/G6A.md
Normal file
74
pages/G6A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G6A – Resistors; capacitors; inductors; rectifiers; solid-state diodes and transistors; vacuum tubes; batteries
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G6A01]] (C)
|
||||
What is the minimum allowable discharge voltage for maximum life of a standard 12-volt lead-acid battery? #card
|
||||
- A. 6 volts
|
||||
- B. 8.5 volts
|
||||
- C. 10.5 volts
|
||||
- D. 12 volts
|
||||
- [[G6A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is an advantage of batteries with low internal resistance? #card
|
||||
- A. Long life
|
||||
- B. High discharge current
|
||||
- C. High voltage
|
||||
- D. Rapid recharge
|
||||
- [[G6A03]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate forward threshold voltage of a germanium diode? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.1 volt
|
||||
- B. 0.3 volts
|
||||
- C. 0.7 volts
|
||||
- D. 1.0 volts
|
||||
- [[G6A04]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of an electrolytic capacitor? #card
|
||||
- A. Tight tolerance
|
||||
- B. Much less leakage than any other type
|
||||
- C. High capacitance for a given volume
|
||||
- D. Inexpensive RF capacitor
|
||||
- [[G6A05]] (C)
|
||||
What is the approximate forward threshold voltage of a silicon junction diode? #card
|
||||
- A. 0.1 volt
|
||||
- B. 0.3 volts
|
||||
- C. 0.7 volts
|
||||
- D. 1.0 volts
|
||||
- [[G6A06]] (B)
|
||||
Why should wire-wound resistors not be used in RF circuits? #card
|
||||
- A. The resistor’s tolerance value would not be adequate
|
||||
- B. The resistor’s inductance could make circuit performance unpredictable
|
||||
- C. The resistor could overheat
|
||||
- D. The resistor’s internal capacitance would detune the circuit
|
||||
- [[G6A07]] (A)
|
||||
What are the operating points for a bipolar transistor used as a switch? #card
|
||||
- A. Saturation and cutoff
|
||||
- B. The active region (between cutoff and saturation)
|
||||
- C. Peak and valley current points
|
||||
- D. Enhancement and depletion modes
|
||||
- [[G6A08]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of low voltage ceramic capacitors? #card
|
||||
- A. Tight tolerance
|
||||
- B. High stability
|
||||
- C. High capacitance for given volume
|
||||
- D. Comparatively low cost
|
||||
- [[G6A09]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes MOSFET construction? #card
|
||||
- A. The gate is formed by a back-biased junction
|
||||
- B. The gate is separated from the channel by a thin insulating layer
|
||||
- C. The source is separated from the drain by a thin insulating layer
|
||||
- D. The source is formed by depositing metal on silicon
|
||||
- [[G6A10]] (A)
|
||||
Which element of a vacuum tube regulates the flow of electrons between cathode and plate? #card
|
||||
- A. Control grid
|
||||
- B. Suppressor grid
|
||||
- C. Screen grid
|
||||
- D. Trigger electrode
|
||||
- [[G6A11]] (C)
|
||||
What happens when an inductor is operated above its self-resonant frequency? #card
|
||||
- A. Its reactance increases
|
||||
- B. Harmonics are generated
|
||||
- C. It becomes capacitive
|
||||
- D. Catastrophic failure is likely
|
||||
- [[G6A12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary purpose of a screen grid in a vacuum tube? #card
|
||||
- A. To reduce grid-to-plate capacitance
|
||||
- B. To increase efficiency
|
||||
- C. To increase the control grid resistance
|
||||
- D. To decrease plate resistance
|
71
pages/G6B.md
Normal file
71
pages/G6B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
|
||||
G6B – Analog and digital integrated circuits (ICs); microwave ICs (MMICs); display devices; RF connectors; ferrite cores
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G6B01]] (C)
|
||||
What determines the performance of a ferrite core at different frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. Its conductivity
|
||||
- B. Its thickness
|
||||
- C. The composition, or “mix,” of materials used
|
||||
- D. The ratio of outer diameter to inner diameter
|
||||
- [[G6B02]] (B)
|
||||
What is meant by the term MMIC? #card
|
||||
- A. Multi-Mode Integrated Circuit
|
||||
- B. Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
|
||||
- C. Metal Monolayer Integrated Circuit
|
||||
- D. Mode Modulated Integrated Circuit
|
||||
- [[G6B03]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of CMOS integrated circuits compared to TTL integrated circuits? #card
|
||||
- A. Low power consumption
|
||||
- B. High power handling capability
|
||||
- C. Better suited for RF amplification
|
||||
- D. Better suited for power supply regulation
|
||||
- [[G6B04]] (C)
|
||||
What is a typical upper frequency limit for low SWR operation of 50-ohm BNC connectors? #card
|
||||
- A. 50 MHz
|
||||
- B. 500 MHz
|
||||
- C. 4 GHz
|
||||
- D. 40 GHz
|
||||
- [[G6B05]] (D)
|
||||
What is an advantage of using a ferrite core toroidal inductor? #card
|
||||
- A. Large values of inductance may be obtained
|
||||
- B. The magnetic properties of the core may be optimized for a specific range of frequencies
|
||||
- C. Most of the magnetic field is contained in the core
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G6B06]] (D)
|
||||
What kind of device is an integrated circuit operational amplifier? #card
|
||||
- A. Digital
|
||||
- B. MMIC
|
||||
- C. Programmable Logic
|
||||
- D. Analog
|
||||
- [[G6B07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a type N connector? #card
|
||||
- A. A moisture-resistant RF connector useful to 10 GHz
|
||||
- B. A small bayonet connector used for data circuits
|
||||
- C. A low noise figure VHF connector
|
||||
- D. A nickel plated version of the PL-259
|
||||
- [[G6B08]] (D)
|
||||
How is an LED biased when emitting light? #card
|
||||
- A. In the tunnel-effect region
|
||||
- B. At the Zener voltage
|
||||
- C. Reverse biased
|
||||
- D. Forward biased
|
||||
- [[G6B09]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G6B10]] (A)
|
||||
How does a ferrite bead or core reduce common-mode RF current on the shield of a coaxial cable? #card
|
||||
- A. By creating an impedance in the current’s path
|
||||
- B. It converts common-mode current to differential mode current
|
||||
- C. By creating an out-of-phase current to cancel the common-mode current
|
||||
- D. Ferrites expel magnetic fields
|
||||
- [[G6B11]] (B)
|
||||
What is an SMA connector? #card
|
||||
- A. A type-S to type-M adaptor
|
||||
- B. A small threaded connector suitable for signals up to several GHz
|
||||
- C. A connector designed for serial multiple access signals
|
||||
- D. A type of push-on connector intended for high-voltage applications
|
||||
- [[G6B12]] (C)
|
||||
Which of these connector types is commonly used for low frequency or dc signal connections to a transceiver? #card
|
||||
- A. PL-259
|
||||
- B. BNC
|
||||
- C. RCA Phono
|
||||
- D. Type N
|
2
pages/G7-1.md
Normal file
2
pages/G7-1.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
|
||||
- 
|
||||
-
|
85
pages/G7A.md
Normal file
85
pages/G7A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
||||
G7A – Power supplies; schematic symbols
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7A01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the function of a power supply bleeder resistor? #card
|
||||
- A. It acts as a fuse for excess voltage
|
||||
- B. It discharges the filter capacitors when power is removed
|
||||
- C. It removes shock hazards from the induction coils
|
||||
- D. It eliminates ground loop current
|
||||
- [[G7A02]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following components are used in a power supply filter network? #card
|
||||
- A. Diodes
|
||||
- B. Transformers and transducers
|
||||
- C. Capacitors and inductors
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G7A03]] (A)
|
||||
Which type of rectifier circuit uses two diodes and a center-tapped transformer? #card
|
||||
- A. Full-wave
|
||||
- B. Full-wave bridge
|
||||
- C. Half-wave
|
||||
- D. Synchronous
|
||||
- [[G7A04]] (A)
|
||||
What is characteristic of a half-wave rectifier in a power supply? #card
|
||||
- A. Only one diode is required
|
||||
- B. The ripple frequency is twice that of a full-wave rectifier
|
||||
- C. More current can be drawn from the half-wave rectifier
|
||||
- D. The output voltage is two times the peak input voltage
|
||||
- [[G7A05]] (B)
|
||||
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a half-wave rectifier? #card
|
||||
- A. 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. 180 degrees
|
||||
- C. 270 degrees
|
||||
- D. 360 degrees
|
||||
- [[G7A06]] (D)
|
||||
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a full-wave rectifier? #card
|
||||
- A. 90 degrees
|
||||
- B. 180 degrees
|
||||
- C. 270 degrees
|
||||
- D. 360 degrees
|
||||
- [[G7A07]] (A)
|
||||
What is the output waveform of an unfiltered full-wave rectifier connected to a resistive load? #card
|
||||
- A. A series of DC pulses at twice the frequency of the AC input
|
||||
- B. A series of DC pulses at the same frequency as the AC input
|
||||
- C. A sine wave at half the frequency of the AC input
|
||||
- D. A steady DC voltage
|
||||
- [[G7A08]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of a switchmode power supply as compared to a linear power supply? #card
|
||||
- A. Faster switching time makes higher output voltage possible
|
||||
- B. Fewer circuit components are required
|
||||
- C. High-frequency operation allows the use of smaller components
|
||||
- D. Inherently more stable
|
||||
- [[G7A09]] (C)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a field effect transistor? #card
|
||||

|
||||
- A. Symbol 2
|
||||
- B. Symbol 5
|
||||
- C. Symbol 1
|
||||
- D. Symbol 4
|
||||
- [[G7A10]] (D)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a Zener diode? #card
|
||||

|
||||
- A. Symbol 4
|
||||
- B. Symbol 1
|
||||
- C. Symbol 11
|
||||
- D. Symbol 5
|
||||
- [[G7A11]] (B)
|
||||
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents an NPN junction transistor? #card
|
||||

|
||||
- A. Symbol 1
|
||||
- B. Symbol 2
|
||||
- C. Symbol 7
|
||||
- D. Symbol 11
|
||||
- [[G7A12]] (C)
|
||||
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a solid core transformer? #card
|
||||

|
||||
- A. Symbol 4
|
||||
- B. Symbol 7
|
||||
- C. Symbol 6
|
||||
- D. Symbol 1
|
||||
- [[G7A13]] (A)
|
||||
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a tapped inductor? #card
|
||||

|
||||
- A. Symbol 7
|
||||
- B. Symbol 11
|
||||
- C. Symbol 6
|
||||
- D. Symbol 1
|
68
pages/G7B.md
Normal file
68
pages/G7B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G7B – Digital circuits; amplifiers and oscillators
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7B01]] (B)
|
||||
What is the purpose of neutralizing an amplifier? #card
|
||||
- A. To limit the modulation index
|
||||
- B. To eliminate self-oscillations
|
||||
- C. To cut off the final amplifier during standby periods
|
||||
- D. To keep the carrier on frequency
|
||||
- [[G7B02]] (D)
|
||||
Which of these classes of amplifiers has the highest efficiency? #card
|
||||
- A. Class A
|
||||
- B. Class B
|
||||
- C. Class AB
|
||||
- D. Class C
|
||||
- [[G7B03]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes the function of a two-input AND gate? #card
|
||||
- A. Output is high when either or both inputs are low
|
||||
- B. Output is high only when both inputs are high
|
||||
- C. Output is low when either or both inputs are high
|
||||
- D. Output is low only when both inputs are high
|
||||
- [[G7B04]] (A)
|
||||
In a Class A amplifier, what percentage of the time does the amplifying device conduct? #card
|
||||
- A. 100%
|
||||
- B. More than 50% but less than 100%
|
||||
- C. 50%
|
||||
- D. Less than 50%
|
||||
- [[G7B05]] (C)
|
||||
How many states does a 3-bit binary counter have? #card
|
||||
- A. 3
|
||||
- B. 6
|
||||
- C. 8
|
||||
- D. 16
|
||||
- [[G7B06]] (A)
|
||||
What is a shift register? #card
|
||||
- A. A clocked array of circuits that passes data in steps along the array
|
||||
- B. An array of operational amplifiers used for tri-state arithmetic operations
|
||||
- C. A digital mixer
|
||||
- D. An analog mixer
|
||||
- [[G7B07]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following are basic components of a sine wave oscillator? #card
|
||||
- A. An amplifier and a divider
|
||||
- B. A frequency multiplier and a mixer
|
||||
- C. A circulator and a filter operating in a feed-forward loop
|
||||
- D. A filter and an amplifier operating in a feedback loop
|
||||
- [[G7B08]] (B)
|
||||
How is the efficiency of an RF power amplifier determined? #card
|
||||
- A. Divide the DC input power by the DC output power
|
||||
- B. Divide the RF output power by the DC input power
|
||||
- C. Multiply the RF input power by the reciprocal of the RF output power
|
||||
- D. Add the RF input power to the DC output power
|
||||
- [[G7B09]] (C)
|
||||
What determines the frequency of an LC oscillator? #card
|
||||
- A. The number of stages in the counter
|
||||
- B. The number of stages in the divider
|
||||
- C. The inductance and capacitance in the tank circuit
|
||||
- D. The time delay of the lag circuit
|
||||
- [[G7B10]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a linear amplifier? #card
|
||||
- A. Any RF power amplifier used in conjunction with an amateur transceiver
|
||||
- B. An amplifier in which the output preserves the input waveform
|
||||
- C. A Class C high efficiency amplifier
|
||||
- D. An amplifier used as a frequency multiplier
|
||||
- [[G7B11]] (B)
|
||||
For which of the following modes is a Class C power stage appropriate for amplifying a modulated signal? #card
|
||||
- A. SSB
|
||||
- B. FM
|
||||
- C. AM
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
86
pages/G7C.md
Normal file
86
pages/G7C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
|
||||
G7C – Transceiver design; filters; oscillators; digital signal processing (DSP)
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G7C01]] (B)
|
||||
What circuit is used to select one of the sidebands from a balanced modulator? #card
|
||||
- A. Carrier oscillator
|
||||
- B. Filter
|
||||
- C. IF amplifier
|
||||
- D. RF amplifier
|
||||
- [[G7C02]] (D)
|
||||
What output is produced by a balanced modulator? #card
|
||||
- A. Frequency modulated RF
|
||||
- B. Audio with equalized frequency response
|
||||
- C. Audio extracted from the modulation signal
|
||||
- D. Double-sideband modulated RF
|
||||
- [[G7C03]] (B)
|
||||
What is one reason to use an impedance matching transformer at a transmitter output? #card
|
||||
- A. To minimize transmitter power output
|
||||
- B. To present the desired impedance to the transmitter and feed line
|
||||
- C. To reduce power supply ripple
|
||||
- D. To minimize radiation resistance
|
||||
- [[G7C04]] (D)
|
||||
How is a product detector used? #card
|
||||
- A. Used in test gear to detect spurious mixing products
|
||||
- B. Used in transmitter to perform frequency multiplication
|
||||
- C. Used in an FM receiver to filter out unwanted sidebands
|
||||
- D. Used in a single sideband receiver to extract the modulated signal
|
||||
- [[G7C05]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of a direct digital synthesizer (DDS)? #card
|
||||
- A. Extremely narrow tuning range
|
||||
- B. Relatively high-power output
|
||||
- C. Pure sine wave output
|
||||
- D. Variable output frequency with the stability of a crystal oscillator
|
||||
- [[G7C06]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of a digital signal processing (DSP) filter compared to an analog filter? #card
|
||||
- A. A wide range of filter bandwidths and shapes can be created
|
||||
- B. Fewer digital components are required
|
||||
- C. Mixing products are greatly reduced
|
||||
- D. The DSP filter is much more effective at VHF frequencies
|
||||
- [[G7C07]] (A)
|
||||
What term specifies a filter’s attenuation inside its passband? #card
|
||||
- A. Insertion loss
|
||||
- B. Return loss
|
||||
- C. Q
|
||||
- D. Ultimate rejection
|
||||
- [[G7C08]] (D)
|
||||
Which parameter affects receiver sensitivity? #card
|
||||
- A. Input amplifier gain
|
||||
- B. Demodulator stage bandwidth
|
||||
- C. Input amplifier noise figure
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G7C09]] (B)
|
||||
What is the phase difference between the I and Q RF signals that software-defined radio (SDR) equipment uses for modulation and demodulation? #card
|
||||
- A. Zero
|
||||
- B. 90 degrees
|
||||
- C. 180 degrees
|
||||
- D. 45 degrees
|
||||
- [[G7C10]] (B)
|
||||
What is an advantage of using I-Q modulation with software-defined radios (SDRs)? #card
|
||||
- A. The need for high resolution analog-to-digital converters is eliminated
|
||||
- B. All types of modulation can be created with appropriate processing
|
||||
- C. Minimum detectible signal level is reduced
|
||||
- D. Automatic conversion of the signal from digital to analog
|
||||
- [[G7C11]] (D)
|
||||
Which of these functions is performed by software in a software-defined radio (SDR)? #card
|
||||
- A. Filtering
|
||||
- B. Detection
|
||||
- C. Modulation
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G7C12]] (C)
|
||||
What is the frequency above which a low-pass filter’s output power is less than half the input power? #card
|
||||
- A. Notch frequency
|
||||
- B. Neper frequency
|
||||
- C. Cutoff frequency
|
||||
- D. Rolloff frequency
|
||||
- [[G7C13]] (D)
|
||||
What term specifies a filter’s maximum ability to reject signals outside its passband? #card
|
||||
- A. Notch depth
|
||||
- B. Rolloff
|
||||
- C. Insertion loss
|
||||
- D. Ultimate rejection
|
||||
- [[G7C14]] (A)
|
||||
The bandwidth of a band-pass filter is measured between what two frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. Upper and lower half-power
|
||||
- B. Cutoff and rolloff
|
||||
- C. Pole and zero
|
||||
- D. Image and harmonic
|
86
pages/G8A.md
Normal file
86
pages/G8A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
|
||||
G8A – Carriers and modulation: AM, FM, and single sideband; modulation envelope; digital modulation; overmodulation; link budgets and link margins
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G8A01]] (B)
|
||||
How is direct binary FSK modulation generated? #card
|
||||
- A. By keying an FM transmitter with a sub-audible tone
|
||||
- B. By changing an oscillator’s frequency directly with a digital control signal
|
||||
- C. By using a transceiver’s computer data interface protocol to change frequencies
|
||||
- D. By reconfiguring the CW keying input to act as a tone generator
|
||||
- [[G8A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the name of the process that changes the phase angle of an RF signal to convey information? #card
|
||||
- A. Phase convolution
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Phase transformation
|
||||
- D. Phase inversion
|
||||
- [[G8A03]] (D)
|
||||
What is the name of the process that changes the instantaneous frequency of an RF wave to convey information? #card
|
||||
- A. Frequency convolution
|
||||
- B. Frequency transformation
|
||||
- C. Frequency conversion
|
||||
- D. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A04]] (B)
|
||||
What emission is produced by a reactance modulator connected to a transmitter RF amplifier stage? #card
|
||||
- A. Multiplex modulation
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Amplitude modulation
|
||||
- D. Pulse modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A05]] (D)
|
||||
What type of modulation varies the instantaneous power level of the RF signal? #card
|
||||
- A. Power modulation
|
||||
- B. Phase modulation
|
||||
- C. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- D. Amplitude modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A06]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is characteristic of QPSK31? #card
|
||||
- A. It is sideband sensitive
|
||||
- B. Its encoding provides error correction
|
||||
- C. Its bandwidth is approximately the same as BPSK31
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G8A07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following phone emissions uses the narrowest bandwidth? #card
|
||||
- A. Single sideband
|
||||
- B. Vestigial sideband
|
||||
- C. Phase modulation
|
||||
- D. Frequency modulation
|
||||
- [[G8A08]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is an effect of overmodulation? #card
|
||||
- A. Insufficient audio
|
||||
- B. Insufficient bandwidth
|
||||
- C. Frequency drift
|
||||
- D. Excessive bandwidth
|
||||
- [[G8A09]] (A)
|
||||
What type of modulation is used by FT8? #card
|
||||
- A. 8-tone frequency shift keying
|
||||
- B. Vestigial sideband
|
||||
- C. Amplitude compressed AM
|
||||
- D. 8-bit direct sequence spread spectrum
|
||||
- [[G8A10]] (C)
|
||||
What is meant by the term “flat-topping,” when referring to an amplitude-modulated phone signal? #card
|
||||
- A. Signal distortion caused by insufficient collector current
|
||||
- B. The transmitter’s automatic level control (ALC) is properly adjusted
|
||||
- C. Signal distortion caused by excessive drive or speech levels
|
||||
- D. The transmitter’s carrier is properly suppressed
|
||||
- [[G8A11]] (A)
|
||||
What is the modulation envelope of an AM signal? #card
|
||||
- A. The waveform created by connecting the peak values of the modulated signal
|
||||
- B. The carrier frequency that contains the signal
|
||||
- C. Spurious signals that envelop nearby frequencies
|
||||
- D. The bandwidth of the modulated signal
|
||||
- [[G8A12]] (D)
|
||||
What is QPSK modulation? #card
|
||||
- A. Modulation using quasi-parallel to serial conversion to reduce bandwidth
|
||||
- B. Modulation using quadra-pole sideband keying to generate spread spectrum signals
|
||||
- C. Modulation using Fast Fourier Transforms to generate frequencies at the first, second, third, and fourth harmonics of the carrier frequency to improve noise immunity
|
||||
- D. Modulation in which digital data is transmitted using 0-, 90-, 180- and 270-degrees phase shift to represent pairs of bits
|
||||
- [[G8A13]] (C)
|
||||
What is a link budget? #card
|
||||
- A. The financial costs associated with operating a radio link
|
||||
- B. The sum of antenna gains minus system losses
|
||||
- C. The sum of transmit power and antenna gains minus system losses as seen at the receiver
|
||||
- D. The difference between transmit power and receiver sensitivity
|
||||
- [[G8A14]] (B)
|
||||
What is link margin? #card
|
||||
- A. The opposite of fade margin
|
||||
- B. The difference between received power level and minimum required signal level at the input to the receiver
|
||||
- C. Transmit power minus receiver sensitivity
|
||||
- D. Receiver sensitivity plus 3 dB
|
80
pages/G8B.md
Normal file
80
pages/G8B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
G8B – Frequency changing; bandwidths of various modes; deviation; intermodulation
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G8B01]] (B)
|
||||
Which mixer input is varied or tuned to convert signals of different frequencies to an intermediate frequency (IF)? #card
|
||||
- A. Image frequency
|
||||
- B. Local oscillator
|
||||
- C. RF input
|
||||
- D. Beat frequency oscillator
|
||||
- [[G8B02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the term for interference from a signal at twice the IF frequency from the desired signal? #card
|
||||
- A. Quadrature response
|
||||
- B. Image response
|
||||
- C. Mixer interference
|
||||
- D. Intermediate interference
|
||||
- [[G8B03]] (A)
|
||||
What is another term for the mixing of two RF signals? #card
|
||||
- A. Heterodyning
|
||||
- B. Synthesizing
|
||||
- C. Frequency inversion
|
||||
- D. Phase inversion
|
||||
- [[G8B04]] (D)
|
||||
What is the stage in a VHF FM transmitter that generates a harmonic of a lower frequency signal to reach the desired operating frequency? #card
|
||||
- A. Mixer
|
||||
- B. Reactance modulator
|
||||
- C. Balanced converter
|
||||
- D. Multiplier
|
||||
- [[G8B05]] (C)
|
||||
Which intermodulation products are closest to the original signal frequencies? #card
|
||||
- A. Second harmonics
|
||||
- B. Even-order
|
||||
- C. Odd-order
|
||||
- D. Intercept point
|
||||
- [[G8B06]] (D)
|
||||
What is the total bandwidth of an FM phone transmission having 5 kHz deviation and 3 kHz modulating frequency? #card
|
||||
- A. 3 kHz
|
||||
- B. 5 kHz
|
||||
- C. 8 kHz
|
||||
- D. 16 kHz
|
||||
- [[G8B07]] (B)
|
||||
What is the frequency deviation for a 12.21 MHz reactance modulated oscillator in a 5 kHz deviation, 146.52 MHz FM phone transmitter? #card
|
||||
- A. 101.75 Hz
|
||||
- B. 416.7 Hz
|
||||
- C. 5 kHz
|
||||
- D. 60 kHz
|
||||
- [[G8B08]] (B)
|
||||
Why is it important to know the duty cycle of the mode you are using when transmitting? #card
|
||||
- A. To aid in tuning your transmitter
|
||||
- B. Some modes have high duty cycles that could exceed the transmitter’s average power rating
|
||||
- C. To allow time for the other station to break in during a transmission
|
||||
- D. To prevent overmodulation
|
||||
- [[G8B09]] (D)
|
||||
Why is it good to match receiver bandwidth to the bandwidth of the operating mode? #card
|
||||
- A. It is required by FCC rules
|
||||
- B. It minimizes power consumption in the receiver
|
||||
- C. It improves impedance matching of the antenna
|
||||
- D. It results in the best signal-to-noise ratio
|
||||
- [[G8B10]] (B)
|
||||
What is the relationship between transmitted symbol rate and bandwidth? #card
|
||||
- A. Symbol rate and bandwidth are not related
|
||||
- B. Higher symbol rates require wider bandwidth
|
||||
- C. Lower symbol rates require wider bandwidth
|
||||
- D. Bandwidth is half the symbol rate
|
||||
- [[G8B11]] (C)
|
||||
What combination of a mixer’s Local Oscillator (LO) and RF input frequencies is found in the output? #card
|
||||
- A. The ratio
|
||||
- B. The average
|
||||
- C. The sum and difference
|
||||
- D. The arithmetic product
|
||||
- [[G8B12]] (A)
|
||||
What process combines two signals in a non-linear circuit to produce unwanted spurious outputs? #card
|
||||
- A. Intermodulation
|
||||
- B. Heterodyning
|
||||
- C. Detection
|
||||
- D. Rolloff
|
||||
- [[G8B13]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following is an odd-order intermodulation product of frequencies F1 and F2? #card
|
||||
- A. 5F1-3F2
|
||||
- B. 3F1-F2
|
||||
- C. 2F1-F2
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
98
pages/G8C.md
Normal file
98
pages/G8C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
|
||||
G8C – Digital emission modes
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G8C01]] (C)
|
||||
On what band do amateurs share channels with the unlicensed Wi-Fi service? #card
|
||||
- A. 432 MHz
|
||||
- B. 902 MHz
|
||||
- C. 2.4 GHz
|
||||
- D. 10.7 GHz
|
||||
- [[G8C02]] (A)
|
||||
Which digital mode is used as a low-power beacon for assessing HF propagation? #card
|
||||
- A. WSPR
|
||||
- B. MFSK16
|
||||
- C. PSK31
|
||||
- D. SSB-SC
|
||||
- [[G8C03]] (C)
|
||||
What part of a packet radio frame contains the routing and handling information? #card
|
||||
- A. Directory
|
||||
- B. Preamble
|
||||
- C. Header
|
||||
- D. Trailer
|
||||
- [[G8C04]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following describes Baudot code? #card
|
||||
- A. A 7-bit code with start, stop, and parity bits
|
||||
- B. A code using error detection and correction
|
||||
- C. A 5-bit code with additional start and stop bits
|
||||
- D. A code using SELCAL and LISTEN
|
||||
- [[G8C05]] (A)
|
||||
In an ARQ mode, what is meant by a NAK response to a transmitted packet? #card
|
||||
- A. Request retransmission of the packet
|
||||
- B. Packet was received without error
|
||||
- C. Receiving station connected and ready for transmissions
|
||||
- D. Entire file received correctly
|
||||
- [[G8C06]] (B)
|
||||
What action results from a failure to exchange information due to excessive transmission attempts when using an ARQ mode? #card
|
||||
- A. The checksum overflows
|
||||
- B. The connection is dropped
|
||||
- C. Packets will be routed incorrectly
|
||||
- D. Encoding reverts to the default character set
|
||||
- [[G8C07]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following narrow-band digital modes can receive signals with very low signal-to-noise ratios? #card
|
||||
- A. MSK144
|
||||
- B. FT8
|
||||
- C. AMTOR
|
||||
- D. MFSK32
|
||||
- [[G8C08]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following statements is true about PSK31? #card
|
||||
- A. Upper case letters are sent with more power
|
||||
- B. Upper case letters use longer Varicode bit sequences and thus slow down transmission
|
||||
- C. Error correction is used to ensure accurate message reception
|
||||
- D. Higher power is needed as compared to RTTY for similar error rates
|
||||
- [[G8C09]] (B)
|
||||
Which is true of mesh network microwave nodes? #card
|
||||
- A. Having more nodes increases signal strengths
|
||||
- B. If one node fails, a packet may still reach its target station via an alternate node
|
||||
- C. Links between two nodes in a network may have different frequencies and bandwidths
|
||||
- D. More nodes reduce overall microwave out of band interference
|
||||
- [[G8C10]] (C)
|
||||
How does forward error correction (FEC) allow the receiver to correct data errors? #card
|
||||
- A. By controlling transmitter output power for optimum signal strength
|
||||
- B. By using the Varicode character set
|
||||
- C. By transmitting redundant information with the data
|
||||
- D. By using a parity bit with each character
|
||||
- [[G8C11]] (D)
|
||||
How are the two separate frequencies of a Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK) signal identified? #card
|
||||
- A. Dot and dash
|
||||
- B. On and off
|
||||
- C. High and low
|
||||
- D. Mark and space
|
||||
- [[G8C12]] (A)
|
||||
Which type of code is used for sending characters in a PSK31 signal? #card
|
||||
- A. Varicode
|
||||
- B. Viterbi
|
||||
- C. Volumetric
|
||||
- D. Binary
|
||||
- [[G8C13]] (D)
|
||||
What is indicated on a waterfall display by one or more vertical lines on either side of a data mode or RTTY signal? #card
|
||||
- A. Long path propagation
|
||||
- B. Backscatter propagation
|
||||
- C. Insufficient modulation
|
||||
- D. Overmodulation
|
||||
- [[G8C14]] (C)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a waterfall display? #card
|
||||
- A. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is vertical, time is intensity
|
||||
- B. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is intensity, time is horizontal
|
||||
- C. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is intensity, time is vertical
|
||||
- D. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is horizontal, time is intensity
|
||||
- [[G8C15]] (C)
|
||||
What does an FT8 signal report of +3 mean? #card
|
||||
- A. The signal is 3 times the noise level of an equivalent SSB signal
|
||||
- B. The signal is S3 (weak signals)
|
||||
- C. The signal-to-noise ratio is equivalent to +3dB in a 2.5 kHz bandwidth
|
||||
- D. The signal is 3 dB over S9
|
||||
- [[G8C16]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following provide digital voice modes? #card
|
||||
- A. WSPR, MFSK16, and EasyPAL
|
||||
- B. FT8, FT4, and FST4
|
||||
- C. Winlink, PACTOR II, and PACTOR III
|
||||
- D. DMR, D-STAR, and SystemFusion
|
68
pages/G9A.md
Normal file
68
pages/G9A.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
|
||||
G9A – Feed lines: characteristic impedance and attenuation; standing wave ratio (SWR) calculation, measurement, and effects; antenna feed point matching
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9A01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following factors determine the characteristic impedance of a parallel conductor feed line? #card
|
||||
- A. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the radius of the conductors
|
||||
- B. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the length of the line
|
||||
- C. The radius of the conductors and the frequency of the signal
|
||||
- D. The frequency of the signal and the length of the line
|
||||
- [[G9A02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the relationship between high standing wave ratio (SWR) and transmission line loss? #card
|
||||
- A. There is no relationship between transmission line loss and SWR
|
||||
- B. High SWR increases loss in a lossy transmission line
|
||||
- C. High SWR makes it difficult to measure transmission line loss
|
||||
- D. High SWR reduces the relative effect of transmission line loss
|
||||
- [[G9A03]] (D)
|
||||
What is the nominal characteristic impedance of “window line” transmission line? #card
|
||||
- A. 50 ohms
|
||||
- B. 75 ohms
|
||||
- C. 100 ohms
|
||||
- D. 450 ohms
|
||||
- [[G9A04]] (C)
|
||||
What causes reflected power at an antenna’s feed point? #card
|
||||
- A. Operating an antenna at its resonant frequency
|
||||
- B. Using more transmitter power than the antenna can handle
|
||||
- C. A difference between feed line impedance and antenna feed point impedance
|
||||
- D. Feeding the antenna with unbalanced feed line
|
||||
- [[G9A05]] (B)
|
||||
How does the attenuation of coaxial cable change with increasing frequency? #card
|
||||
- A. Attenuation is independent of frequency
|
||||
- B. Attenuation increases
|
||||
- C. Attenuation decreases
|
||||
- D. Attenuation follows Marconi’s Law of Attenuation
|
||||
- [[G9A06]] (D)
|
||||
In what units is RF feed line loss usually expressed? #card
|
||||
- A. Ohms per 1,000 feet
|
||||
- B. Decibels per 1,000 feet
|
||||
- C. Ohms per 100 feet
|
||||
- D. Decibels per 100 feet
|
||||
- [[G9A07]] (D)
|
||||
What must be done to prevent standing waves on a feed line connected to an antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. The antenna feed point must be at DC ground potential
|
||||
- B. The feed line must be an odd number of electrical quarter wavelengths long
|
||||
- C. The feed line must be an even number of physical half wavelengths long
|
||||
- D. The antenna feed point impedance must be matched to the characteristic impedance of the feed line
|
||||
- [[G9A08]] (B)
|
||||
If the SWR on an antenna feed line is 5:1, and a matching network at the transmitter end of the feed line is adjusted to present a 1:1 SWR to the transmitter, what is the resulting SWR on the feed line? #card
|
||||
- A. 1:1
|
||||
- B. 5:1
|
||||
- C. Between 1:1 and 5:1 depending on the characteristic impedance of the line
|
||||
- D. Between 1:1 and 5:1 depending on the reflected power at the transmitter
|
||||
- [[G9A09]] (A)
|
||||
What standing wave ratio results from connecting a 50-ohm feed line to a 200-ohm resistive load? #card
|
||||
- A. 4:1
|
||||
- B. 1:4
|
||||
- C. 2:1
|
||||
- D. 1:2
|
||||
- [[G9A10]] (D)
|
||||
What standing wave ratio results from connecting a 50-ohm feed line to a 10-ohm resistive load? #card
|
||||
- A. 2:1
|
||||
- B. 1:2
|
||||
- C. 1:5
|
||||
- D. 5:1
|
||||
- [[G9A11]] (A)
|
||||
What is the effect of transmission line loss on SWR measured at the input to the line? #card
|
||||
- A. Higher loss reduces SWR measured at the input to the line
|
||||
- B. Higher loss increases SWR measured at the input to the line
|
||||
- C. Higher loss increases the accuracy of SWR measured at the input to the line
|
||||
- D. Transmission line loss does not affect the SWR measurement
|
74
pages/G9B.md
Normal file
74
pages/G9B.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
|
||||
G9B – Basic dipole and monopole antennas
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9B01]] (B)
|
||||
What is a characteristic of a random-wire HF antenna connected directly to the transmitter? #card
|
||||
- A. It must be longer than 1 wavelength
|
||||
- B. Station equipment may carry significant RF current
|
||||
- C. It produces only vertically polarized radiation
|
||||
- D. It is more effective on the lower HF bands than on the higher bands
|
||||
- [[G9B02]] (B)
|
||||
Which of the following is a common way to adjust the feed point impedance of an elevated quarter-wave ground-plane vertical antenna to be approximately 50 ohms? #card
|
||||
- A. Slope the radials upward
|
||||
- B. Slope the radials downward
|
||||
- C. Lengthen the radials beyond one wavelength
|
||||
- D. Coil the radials
|
||||
- [[G9B03]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following best describes the radiation pattern of a quarter-wave ground-plane vertical antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Bi-directional in azimuth
|
||||
- B. Isotropic
|
||||
- C. Hemispherical
|
||||
- D. Omnidirectional in azimuth
|
||||
- [[G9B04]] (A)
|
||||
What is the radiation pattern of a dipole antenna in free space in a plane containing the conductor? #card
|
||||
- A. It is a figure-eight at right angles to the antenna
|
||||
- B. It is a figure-eight off both ends of the antenna
|
||||
- C. It is a circle (equal radiation in all directions)
|
||||
- D. It has a pair of lobes on one side of the antenna and a single lobe on the other side
|
||||
- [[G9B05]] (C)
|
||||
How does antenna height affect the azimuthal radiation pattern of a horizontal dipole HF antenna at elevation angles higher than about 45 degrees? #card
|
||||
- A. If the antenna is too high, the pattern becomes unpredictable
|
||||
- B. Antenna height has no effect on the pattern
|
||||
- C. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, the azimuthal pattern is almost omnidirectional
|
||||
- D. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, radiation off the ends of the wire is eliminated
|
||||
- [[G9B06]] (C)
|
||||
Where should the radial wires of a ground-mounted vertical antenna system be placed? #card
|
||||
- A. As high as possible above the ground
|
||||
- B. Parallel to the antenna element
|
||||
- C. On the surface or buried a few inches below the ground
|
||||
- D. At the center of the antenna
|
||||
- [[G9B07]] (B)
|
||||
How does the feed point impedance of a horizontal 1/2 wave dipole antenna change as the antenna height is reduced to 1/10 wavelength above ground? #card
|
||||
- A. It steadily increases
|
||||
- B. It steadily decreases
|
||||
- C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength above ground
|
||||
- D. It is unaffected by the height above ground
|
||||
- [[G9B08]] (A)
|
||||
How does the feed point impedance of a 1/2 wave dipole change as the feed point is moved from the center toward the ends? #card
|
||||
- A. It steadily increases
|
||||
- B. It steadily decreases
|
||||
- C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength from the end
|
||||
- D. It is unaffected by the location of the feed point
|
||||
- [[G9B09]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of using a horizontally polarized as compared to a vertically polarized HF antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Lower ground losses
|
||||
- B. Lower feed point impedance
|
||||
- C. Shorter radials
|
||||
- D. Lower radiation resistance
|
||||
- [[G9B10]] (D)
|
||||
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 14.250 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. 8 feet
|
||||
- B. 16 feet
|
||||
- C. 24 feet
|
||||
- D. 33 feet
|
||||
- [[G9B11]] (C)
|
||||
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 3.550 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. 42 feet
|
||||
- B. 84 feet
|
||||
- C. 132 feet
|
||||
- D. 263 feet
|
||||
- [[G9B12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the approximate length for a 1/4 wave monopole antenna cut for 28.5 MHz? #card
|
||||
- A. 8 feet
|
||||
- B. 11 feet
|
||||
- C. 16 feet
|
||||
- D. 21 feet
|
71
pages/G9C.md
Normal file
71
pages/G9C.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
|
||||
G9C – Directional antennas
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9C01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following would increase the bandwidth of a Yagi antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Larger-diameter elements
|
||||
- B. Closer element spacing
|
||||
- C. Loading coils in series with the element
|
||||
- D. Tapered-diameter elements
|
||||
- [[G9C02]] (B)
|
||||
What is the approximate length of the driven element of a Yagi antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. 1/4 wavelength
|
||||
- B. 1/2 wavelength
|
||||
- C. 3/4 wavelength
|
||||
- D. 1 wavelength
|
||||
- [[G9C03]] (A)
|
||||
How do the lengths of a three-element Yagi reflector and director compare to that of the driven element? #card
|
||||
- A. The reflector is longer, and the director is shorter
|
||||
- B. The reflector is shorter, and the director is longer
|
||||
- C. They are all the same length
|
||||
- D. Relative length depends on the frequency of operation
|
||||
- [[G9C04]] (B)
|
||||
How does antenna gain in dBi compare to gain stated in dBd for the same antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Gain in dBi is 2.15 dB lower
|
||||
- B. Gain in dBi is 2.15 dB higher
|
||||
- C. Gain in dBd is 1.25 dBd lower
|
||||
- D. Gain in dBd is 1.25 dBd higher
|
||||
- [[G9C05]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary effect of increasing boom length and adding directors to a Yagi antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Gain increases
|
||||
- B. Beamwidth increases
|
||||
- C. Front-to-back ratio decreases
|
||||
- D. Resonant frequency is lower
|
||||
- [[G9C06]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9C07]] (C)
|
||||
What does “front-to-back ratio” mean in reference to a Yagi antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. The number of directors versus the number of reflectors
|
||||
- B. The relative position of the driven element with respect to the reflectors and directors
|
||||
- C. The power radiated in the major lobe compared to that in the opposite direction
|
||||
- D. The ratio of forward gain to dipole gain
|
||||
- [[G9C08]] (D)
|
||||
What is meant by the “main lobe” of a directive antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. The magnitude of the maximum vertical angle of radiation
|
||||
- B. The point of maximum current in a radiating antenna element
|
||||
- C. The maximum voltage standing wave point on a radiating element
|
||||
- D. The direction of maximum radiated field strength from the antenna
|
||||
- [[G9C09]] (B)
|
||||
In free space, how does the gain of two three-element, horizontally polarized Yagi antennas spaced vertically 1/2 wavelength apart typically compare to the gain of a single three-element Yagi? #card
|
||||
- A. Approximately 1.5 dB higher
|
||||
- B. Approximately 3 dB higher
|
||||
- C. Approximately 6 dB higher
|
||||
- D. Approximately 9 dB higher
|
||||
- [[G9C10]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following can be adjusted to optimize forward gain, front-to-back ratio, or SWR bandwidth of a Yagi antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. The physical length of the boom
|
||||
- B. The number of elements on the boom
|
||||
- C. The spacing of each element along the boom
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
||||
- [[G9C11]] (A)
|
||||
What is a beta or hairpin match? #card
|
||||
- A. A shorted transmission line stub placed at the feed point of a Yagi antenna to provide impedance matching
|
||||
- B. A 1/4 wavelength section of 75-ohm coax in series with the feed point of a Yagi to provide impedance matching
|
||||
- C. A series capacitor selected to cancel the inductive reactance of a folded dipole antenna
|
||||
- D. A section of 300-ohm twin-lead transmission line used to match a folded dipole antenna
|
||||
- [[G9C12]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is a characteristic of using a gamma match with a Yagi antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. It does not require the driven element to be insulated from the boom
|
||||
- B. It does not require any inductors or capacitors
|
||||
- C. It is useful for matching multiband antennas
|
||||
- D. All these choices are correct
|
80
pages/G9D.md
Normal file
80
pages/G9D.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
G9D – Specialized antenna types and applications
|
||||
|
||||
- [[G9D01]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following antenna types will be most effective as a near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS) antenna for short-skip communications on 40 meters during the day? #card
|
||||
- A. A horizontal dipole placed between 1/10 and 1/4 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- B. A vertical antenna placed between 1/4 and 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- C. A horizontal dipole placed at approximately 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- D. A vertical dipole placed at approximately 1/2 wavelength above the ground
|
||||
- [[G9D02]] (D)
|
||||
What is the feed point impedance of an end-fed half-wave antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Very low
|
||||
- B. Approximately 50 ohms
|
||||
- C. Approximately 300 ohms
|
||||
- D. Very high
|
||||
- [[G9D03]] (C)
|
||||
In which direction is the maximum radiation from a VHF/UHF “halo” antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Broadside to the plane of the halo
|
||||
- B. Opposite the feed point
|
||||
- C. Omnidirectional in the plane of the halo
|
||||
- D. On the same side as the feed point
|
||||
- [[G9D04]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary function of antenna traps? #card
|
||||
- A. To enable multiband operation
|
||||
- B. To notch spurious frequencies
|
||||
- C. To provide balanced feed point impedance
|
||||
- D. To prevent out-of-band operation
|
||||
- [[G9D05]] (D)
|
||||
What is an advantage of vertically stacking horizontally polarized Yagi antennas? #card
|
||||
- A. It allows quick selection of vertical or horizontal polarization
|
||||
- B. It allows simultaneous vertical and horizontal polarization
|
||||
- C. It narrows the main lobe in azimuth
|
||||
- D. It narrows the main lobe in elevation
|
||||
- [[G9D06]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following is an advantage of a log-periodic antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Wide bandwidth
|
||||
- B. Higher gain per element than a Yagi antenna
|
||||
- C. Harmonic suppression
|
||||
- D. Polarization diversity
|
||||
- [[G9D07]] (A)
|
||||
Which of the following describes a log-periodic antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Element length and spacing vary logarithmically along the boom
|
||||
- B. Impedance varies periodically as a function of frequency
|
||||
- C. Gain varies logarithmically as a function of frequency
|
||||
- D. SWR varies periodically as a function of boom length
|
||||
- [[G9D08]] (B)
|
||||
How does a “screwdriver” mobile antenna adjust its feed point impedance? #card
|
||||
- A. By varying its body capacitance
|
||||
- B. By varying the base loading inductance
|
||||
- C. By extending and retracting the whip
|
||||
- D. By deploying a capacitance hat
|
||||
- [[G9D09]] (A)
|
||||
What is the primary use of a Beverage antenna? #card
|
||||
- A. Directional receiving for MF and low HF bands
|
||||
- B. Directional transmitting for low HF bands
|
||||
- C. Portable direction finding at higher HF frequencies
|
||||
- D. Portable direction finding at lower HF frequencies
|
||||
- [[G9D10]] (B)
|
||||
In which direction or directions does an electrically small loop (less than 1/10 wavelength in circumference) have nulls in its radiation pattern? #card
|
||||
- A. In the plane of the loop
|
||||
- B. Broadside to the loop
|
||||
- C. Broadside and in the plane of the loop
|
||||
- D. Electrically small loops are omnidirectional
|
||||
- [[G9D11]] (D)
|
||||
Which of the following is a disadvantage of multiband antennas? #card
|
||||
- A. They present low impedance on all design frequencies
|
||||
- B. They must be used with an antenna tuner
|
||||
- C. They must be fed with open wire line
|
||||
- D. They have poor harmonic rejection
|
||||
- [[G9D12]] (A)
|
||||
What is the common name of a dipole with a single central support? #card
|
||||
- A. Inverted V
|
||||
- B. Inverted L
|
||||
- C. Sloper
|
||||
- D. Lazy H
|
||||
- [[G9D13]] Question Removed (section not renumbered)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SUBELEMENT G0 – ELECTRICAL AND RF SAFETY [2 Exam Questions – 2 Groups]
|
||||
|
45
pages/General Syllabus.md
Normal file
45
pages/General Syllabus.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G1]] – COMMISSION’S RULES [5 Exam Questions – 5 Groups] 57 Questions
|
||||
- [[G1A]] – General class control operator frequency privileges; primary and secondary allocations
|
||||
- [[G1B]] – Antenna structure limitations; good engineering and good amateur practice; beacon operation; prohibited transmissions; retransmitting radio signals
|
||||
- [[G1C]] – Transmitter power regulations; data emission standards; 60-meter operation requirements
|
||||
- [[G1D]] – Volunteer Examiners and Volunteer Examiner Coordinators; temporary identification; element credit; remote operation
|
||||
- [[G1E]] – Control categories; repeater regulations; third-party rules; ITU regions; automatically controlled digital station
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G2]] – OPERATING PROCEDURES [5 Exam Questions – 5 Groups] 60 Questions
|
||||
- [[G2A]] – Phone operating procedures: USB/LSB conventions, breaking into a contact, transmitter setup for voice operation; answering DX stations
|
||||
- [[G2B]] – Operating effectively; band plans; drills and emergencies; RACES operation
|
||||
- [[G2C]] – CW operating procedures and procedural signals; Q signals; full break-in
|
||||
- [[G2D]] – Volunteer Monitor Program; HF operations
|
||||
- [[G2E]] – Digital mode operating procedures
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G3]] – RADIO WAVE PROPAGATION [3 Exam Questions – 3 Groups] 37 Questions
|
||||
- [[G3A]] – Sunspots and solar radiation; geomagnetic field and stability indices
|
||||
- [[G3B]] – Maximum Usable Frequency; Lowest Usable Frequency; short path and long path propagation; determining propagation conditions; ionospheric refraction
|
||||
- [[G3C]] – Ionospheric regions; critical angle and frequency; HF scatter; near vertical incidence skywave (NVIS)
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G4]] – AMATEUR RADIO PRACTICES [5 Exam Questions – 5 groups] 60 Questions
|
||||
- [[G4A]] – Station configuration and operation
|
||||
- [[G4B]] – Tests and test equipment
|
||||
- [[G4C]] – Interference to consumer electronics; grounding and bonding
|
||||
- [[G4D]] – Speech processors; S meters; sideband operation near band edges
|
||||
- [[G4E]] – Mobile and portable HF stations; alternative energy source operation
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G5]] – ELECTRICAL PRINCIPLES [3 Exam Questions – 3 Groups] 40 Questions
|
||||
- [[G5A]] – Reactance; inductance; capacitance; impedance; impedance transformation; resonance
|
||||
- [[G5B]] – The decibel; current and voltage dividers; electrical power calculations; sine wave root-mean-square (RMS) values; PEP calculations
|
||||
- [[G5C]] – Resistors, capacitors, and inductors in series and parallel; transformers
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G6]] – CIRCUIT COMPONENTS [2 Exam Questions – 2 Groups] 24 Questions
|
||||
- [[G6A]] – Resistors; capacitors; inductors; rectifiers; solid-state diodes and transistors; vacuum tubes; batteries
|
||||
- [[G6B]] – Analog and digital integrated circuits (ICs); microwave ICs (MMICs); display devices; RF connectors; ferrite cores
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G7]] – PRACTICAL CIRCUITS [3 Exam Questions – 3 Groups] 38 Questions
|
||||
- [[G7A]] – Power supplies; schematic symbols
|
||||
- [[G7B]] – Digital circuits; amplifiers and oscillators
|
||||
- [[G7C]] – Transceiver design; filters; oscillators; digital signal processing (DSP)
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G8]] – SIGNALS AND EMISSIONS [3 Exam Questions – 3 Groups] 43 Questions
|
||||
- [[G8A]] – Carriers and modulation: AM, FM, and single sideband; modulation envelope; digital modulation; overmodulation; link budgets and link margins
|
||||
- [[G8B]] – Frequency changing; bandwidths of various modes; deviation; intermodulation
|
||||
- [[G8C]] – Digital emission modes
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G9]] – ANTENNAS AND FEED LINES [4 Exam Questions – 4 Groups] 46 Questions
|
||||
- [[G9A]] – Feed lines: characteristic impedance and attenuation; standing wave ratio (SWR) calculation, measurement, and effects; antenna feed point matching
|
||||
- [[G9B]] – Basic dipole and monopole antennas
|
||||
- [[G9C]] – Directional antennas
|
||||
- [[G9D]] – Specialized antenna types and applications
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G0]] – ELECTRICAL AND RF SAFETY [2 Exam Questions – 2 Groups] 25 Questions
|
||||
- [[G0A]] – RF safety principles, rules, and guidelines; routine station evaluation
|
||||
- [[G0B]] – Station safety: electrical shock, grounding, fusing, interlocks, and wiring; antenna and tower safety
|
13
pages/contents.md
Normal file
13
pages/contents.md
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
|
||||
- [[About]]
|
||||
- [[General Syllabus]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G1]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G2]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G3]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G4]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G5]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G6]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G7]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G8]]
|
||||
- [[SUBELEMENT G9]]
|
||||
- [[Diagrams]
|
||||
- [[G7-1]]
|
Loading…
x
Reference in New Issue
Block a user